Technical catalog

ABB molded case circuit breakers
UL 489 and CSA C22.2 Standard

1SDC210018D0202

O

OVERVIEW
MAIN CHARACTERISTICS THE RANGES ACCESSORIES CHARACTERISTIC CURVES AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION WIRING DIAGRAMS OVERALL DIMENSIONS ORDERING CODES

C O M P L E T E A N D P E R F E C T LY I N T E G R AT E D
In the range of molded case circuit breakers conforming with the UL 489 and CSA C22.2 Standard, ABB proposes an entire range which covers current ratings between 15 A and 2500 A and interrupting ratings, at 480 V AC, which can reach 150 kA. The ranges available are as follows: – circuit breakers for power distribution (fitted with thermomagnetic or electronic trip units starting from 100 A) – circuit breakers with adjustable magnetic only trip units for motor protection (MCP: Motor Control Protection) – molded case switches for use as isolators or switching devices for lines, busbars or parts of a plant (MCS: Molded Case Switch) With the introduction of the new Tmax UL series, a single-pole circuit breaker with interrupting rating of 18 kA at 277 V AC is available on the American market for the first time.

480 V
All ABB circuit breakers in accordance with the UL 489 and CSA C22.2 Standard can be used in installations with wye or delta distribution systems since use of the circuit breaker at 480 V AC is guaranteed, even for the smallest Tmax T1 size.

C O M PA C T D I M E N S I O N S
ABB molded case circuit breakers ensure high performances in extremely small and compact dimensions. Standardization of the depth of the smaller sizes allows more rational and less deep enclosure to be used than in the past.

D O U B L E I N S U L AT I O N
Thanks to the double insulation technique, with all ABB molded case circuit breakers* the electrical accessories can be mounted directly on field with the circuit breaker installed: this allows considerable savings in time and therefore in costs.
* Except for Isomax S8.

.

ABB experience in designing and manufacturing molded case circuit breakers has made it possible to create circuit breakers which. allow any application to be faced practically and simply. The new Tmax have been thought up to work together. The latest generation technology is present for the first time even in the smallest sizes. and so does freedom. The T Generation grows. from all types of accessories and terminals. to help you carry out selections and correct sizing. up to 600 A. The Tmax T4 and T5 circuit breakers have obtained the prestigious “INTEL Design 2003 – Augusto Morello award” in the Product Technologies and Production processes section. to make installation simpler. but above all to give you top level performances. BE FREE.T GENERATION Tmax has grown. With Tmax you have everything you need at hand to make your job easier. . TMAX.

T .

. to provide double insulation for ever greater safety right from the smallest size.TECHNOLOGY It was not easy to find solutions which would allow the Tmax circuit breakers to achieve such high performances in such limited dimensions. the objectives we had set TMAX. So this has meant being able to equip such a small circuit breaker as the T2 with an electronic trip unit. ourselves have been achieved. but thanks to the experience which has been recognised to a leader such as ABB for decades. The new Tmax T4 and T5 are an example of the great technology expressed by this family of circuit breakers with high breaking capacity and high limitation of the specific let-through energy. to fit the circuit breakers with new arcing chambers which allow the arc extinction time to be reduced. still further. BE FREE TO RIDE THE MOST ADVANCED TECHNOLOGY. A complete series of latest generation trip units is available.all interchangeable. from the electronic to the thermomagnetic or magnetic only ones . or. Being free is also all this.

.

. solution for motor protection with the motor control protection (MCP). high selectivity values are obtained for optimal coordination with other circuit breakers. Less oversizing and therefore lower costs. Furthermore. all the solutions needed can be chosen. BE FREE TO CHOOSE OPTIMAL SIZING. With T1. Less space required in the switchgear and in the metal structures. with the latter. With Tmax.T2 and T3 you can find the ideal product for sizing an installation up to 225 A. Easier selection of the circuit breakers and accessories. You can also choose the best TMAX. Higher performances in less space. Fewer stock complications.SIZING All the circuit breakers in the Tmax family come from optimisation of installation sizing. Less time for coordinating the installations. Optimal sizing of the installation and better protection of cables. and with T4 and T5 up to 600 A. busbar ducts and supports. More applications up to 600 A. as well as that of feeling freer to choose.

I .

passing from a fixed circuit breaker to a plug-in/ draw out one is child’s play. Flexibility of use over the whole series is ensured by the complete range of connection terminals and by the large number of accessories. thanks to special kits. and the latter also have the same height. therefore notable savings in time five sizes. plug-in and draw out and. just two depths .76 inches (70 mm) for T1. simpler installation. .more space for cabling operations and TMAX.07 inches (103.5 mm) for T4 and T5. T3 and 4.INSTALLATION Having circuit breakers available with smaller dimensions than all the others on the market undoubtedly offers great advantages .2. Being free also means having much more time for yourself. BE FREE TO DRIBBLE ROUND ALL INSTALLATION DIFFICULTIES. They are also available in all the versions: fixed. T2.

.

– MCP: S6. Modular design also makes installation and assembly extremely simple. .1 0 0 % U L R AT E D C I R C U I T B R E A K E R S The 100% rated versions for Isomax circuit breakers are available thanks to the excellent thermal sizing of the latter. S7 and S8 circuit breakers with magnetic only trip unit for motor control protection. S7 and S8 molded case circuit breakers for power distribution. A L L T H E A P P L I C AT I O N S ABB offers the right solution for any application up to 2500 A thanks to Isomax S6. Accessories are standardized for groups of circuit breakers to streamline storage logistics and simplify installation. S7 and S8 molded case switches for using as isolators or switching devices for lines. Isomax circuit breakers can be customized as required under conditions of absolute safety. – MCS: S6. S7 and S8 circuit breakers. All the accessories can be mounted with simple operations without exposing the main contacts (except for the Isomax S8). COMPLETE RANGE OF ACCESSORIES Isomax circuit breakers are complemented by a complete range of accessories to satisfy the widely differing operational and automation requirements. perfectly integrated with the Tmax family: – MCCB: S6. busbars or parts of plants. M A X I M U M V E R S AT I L I T Y Isomax circuit breakers can be fitted with a wide range of terminals for every kind of connections.

Icu AC (50-60 Hz) 220/230 V 380/415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V DC 250 V .13/105 5. Iu Number of poles Rated service voltage.76/70 25000 240 8000 120 Mechanical life Electrical life @ 415 V AC (1) (2) In15A = 10kA @ 277 V AC In15A = 35 kA @ 240 V AC.54/90 4.4 600Y/347 500 N S 50 65 25 35 10 10 25 35 25 35 AC (50-60Hz) DC ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Versions ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Tmax T1 1P IEC 60947-2 Rated uninterrupted current.76/70 25000 240 8000 120 5.4 690 500 C 40 25 15 10 4 25 30 160 3.72/120 2.operations] [No.12/130 3/76 4/102 2.4 2.4 690 500 S H 85 100 50 70 45 55 30 36 7 8 50 70 55 85 Tmax T3 250 3. Ue [A] [Nr] [V] [V] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] 160 1 240 125 B 25 Tmax T1 Tmax T2 160 3.3 poles in series 500 V .2 poles in series 600 V .2 poles in series 500 V . Hourly operations] 5.operations] [No.Circuit breakers for power distribution Electrical characteristics Tmax T1 1P UL 489 CSA C22.3 poles in series Trip units TMF TMD/TMA ELT MA MCCB MCS MCP [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [A] [Nr] [V] [V] 100 1 277 B 18(1) 14(1) Tmax T1 Tmax T2 100 3.51/140 2. 14 kA @ 480Y/277 V AC TMF = Thermomagnetic trip unit with fixed thermal and magnetic threshold TMD = Thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal threshold and fixed magnetic threshold .76/70 25000 240 8000 120 5.2 and IEC 60947-2 Dimensions H W 1p or 3p W 4p D [in/mm] [in/mm] [in/mm] [in/mm] [No.2 Frame size Number of poles Rated voltage Interrupting ratings AC 240 V 277 V 480 V 600Y/347 V 600 V DC 250 V .9/150 4.4 480 S H 65 100 35 65 Tmax T3 225 3.4 600Y/347 500 N 50(2) 22(2) 10 25 25 100 3.2 poles in series 500 V .76/70 25000 240 8000 120 5. Hourly operations] [No.12/130 1/25.3 poles in series 500 V .12/130 3.3 poles in series Trip units TMF TMD/TMA ELT MF MA B 25 16 10 8 3 16 20 N 50 36 22 15 6 36 40 N 65 36 30 25 6 36 40 L 120 85 75 50 10 85 100 16 25 36 ■ ■ 36 50 70 85 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ UL 489 CSA C22.4 690 500 N S 50 85 36 50 25 40 20 30 5 8 36 50 40 55 36 50 AC (50-60Hz) DC Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity.2 poles in series 250 V .3 poles in series 750 V .

1600 3.51/140 4. 2000.4 600 600 N H L 65 150 200 50 65 100 25 35 42 Isomax S7 1200 2.3.320 3.07/205 5.02/280 4.24/184 4.Tmax T4 250 2.4 690 750 S H L 85 100 200 50 70 120 40 65 100 30 50 85 25 40 70 50 70 120 Isomax S6 630 .5 20000 120 7000(630A)-5000(800A) 60 = Magnetic fixed trip unit = Magnetic adjustable trip unit 15. 2500.55/268 8.3.630 3.4 690 S 85 50 40 35 20 H 100 65 55 45 25 L 200 100 80 70 35 Isomax S8 2000.4 600 600 N S H L V 65 100 150 200 200 25 35 65 100 150 18 25 35 65 100 Isomax S6 800 2.3.4 690 H 85 85 70 50 40 V 120 120 100 70 50 N 70 36 30 25 20 36 V 300 200 180 150 80 200 N 70 36 30 25 20 36 V 300 200 180 150 80 200 N 65 35 30 25 20 35 25 36 50 70 100 16 25 36 50 70 ■ ■ ■ 25 36 50 70 100 16 25 36 50 70 ■ ■ 20 35 50 65 16 20 35 50 ■ ■ ■ ■ 8.13/105 5.07/103.51/140 7.4 600 600 N S H L V 65 100 150 200 200 25 35 18 25 65 100 150 35 65 100 Tmax T5 400 .89/556 9.5 10000 120 7000(1250A)-5000(1600A) 20 ELT = Electronic trip unit 15.3.07/103.5 20000 240 8000(250A)-6000(320A) 120 8.27/210 11. 3200 3.98/406 21.4 690 750 S H L 85 100 200 50 70 120 40 65 100 30 50 85 25 40 70 50 70 120 Tmax T5 400 .4 600 H 100 65 50 Isomax S8 1600.07/103.98/406 8.27/210 11.53/242 10000 20 2500(2500A)-1500(3200A) 20(2500A)-10(3200A) TMA = Thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal and magnetic threshold .800 3. 2500 3 600 V 125 100 85 25 35 16 25 50 65 100 35 50 65 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 25 35 50 65 100 16 25 35 50 65 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 35 50 65 20 35 50 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Tmax T4 250 .45/138.4 690 750 S H L 85 100 200 50 65 100 45 50 80 35 40 65 22 25 30 50 65 100 Isomax S7 1250 .02/280 5.600 2.07/205 4.75/400 15.5 20000 120 7000(400A)-5000(630A) 60 MF MA 10.

12-130 1-25.76-70 160 3/4 690 N 36 30 6 100 S H 50 70 45 55 7 8 100 100 5.12-130 3-76 2.8 2 T3D 3/4 250 690 8 800 5.54-90 2.13-105 2.76-70 Tmax T2 Tmax T3 (AC) 50-60Hz 380/415 V AC 440 V AC 690 V AC Ics/Icu @ 380/415 V AC % Dimensions fixed version (3p) H W D 5.76-70 T2 Circuit breakers for motor protection Iu Poles In Ue Trip unit [A] [A] [V] Adjustable magnetic only (6…12xIn) Electronic PR221DS-I PR222/MP (IEC 60947-4-1) PR212/P-I PR212/MP (IEC 60947-4-1) 160 3 1…100 690 ■ ■ T3 250 3 100…200 690 ■ T1D Switch-disconnectors Poles Ith Ue Uimp Ui Icm Icw (1s) * For In 16A and In 20A: Icu @ 220/230 V AC = 16 KA [Nr] [A] [V] [KV] [V] [KA] [KA] 3/4 160 690 8 800 2.6 .Circuit breakers for specific applications in accordance with IEC 60947-2 Tmax T1 1P Tmax T1 Circuit breakers for distribution AC-DC Rated uninterrupted current Numbers of poles Rated voltage Icu [A] Nr [V] [kA rms] [kA rms] [kA rms] [kA rms] [in-mm] [in-mm] [in-mm] 160 1 240 B 25* 160 3/4 690 B C N 16 25 36 10 15 22 3 4 6 100 100 50 5.3 3.76-70 L 85 75 10 75 225 3/4 690 N S 36 50 25 40 5 8 75 50 5.12-130 3.4 2.0-150 4.

Tmax T4 250 3/4 690 S H L 50 70 120 40 65 100 25 40 70 100 100 100 8.25-235 N 36 30 20 100 V 200 180 80 100 N 36 30 20 100 T4 250 3 80…250 690 ■ ■ ■ T5 400 3 320-400 690 ■ ■ S7 1250-1600 3 1000…1600 690 ■ ■ T4D 3/4 250-320 690 8 800 5.51/140 4.5 Tmax T5 400-630 3/4 690 S H L 50 70 120 40 65 100 25 40 70 100 100 100 8.25-268 8.5 Isomax S8 2000-2500-3200 3/4 690 H V 85 120 70 100 40 50 50 50 15.5 25 S8D 3/4 2000-2500-3200 690 8 800 85 40 .27-210 5.45-138.07-103.5 Isomax S6 800 3/4 690 V 200 180 80 100 N 35 30 20 100 S H 50 65 45 50 22 25 100 100 14.13/105 4.5 L 100 80 30 75 Isomax S7 1250-1600 3/4 690 S H L 50 65 100 40 55 80 20 25 35 100 75 50 16-406 8.07/103.98-406 9.07/205 4.07-103.6 T5D 3/4 400-630 690 8 800 11 6 S6D 3/4 800 690 8 800 30 15 S7D 3/4 1000-1250-1600 690 8 800 52.27-210 4.75-400 15.3 3.07/205 5.

1 .

.................................................. 1/4 ABB 1/1 ................................. 1/2 Construction characteristics Distinguishing features of the series .........Main characteristics 1 Index General information ....................................................................................................

General information 7 22 21 1 19 18 23 20 4 1 17 16 15 14 6 3 5 10 8 2 12 9 7 11 13 1/2 ABB .

Auxiliary contacts . T1. three-pole and four-pole versions.UVR (2) 6. Trip units (1) 3. ranges (Tmax T1B 1p. Guide of fixed part in the draw out version (2) 22. plug-in or draw out. The circuit breakers can be selected among different interrupting rating levels from 22 kA to 150 kA at 480 V AC and from 18 kA up to 100 kA at 600 V AC. Front for lever operating mechanism .MOE (2) 11. Front extended terminal . T5 and Isomax S6. The Tmax T1 circuit breaker is also available in the single pole Tmax T1B 1p version. with UL 489 and CSA C22. perfectly integrated. Terminal covers 8. PR010T 26. T2. Stored energy motor operator .1 Standard .FP (2) 23. Shunt trip .AUE 13. T4.2 No. Various accessories are also available: 1.KLF 12. Multi-cable terminal (only for T4) . Transmitted rotary handle .FC Cu (UL listed for Tmax T1) 15. Auxiliary position contact . S8). S7. able to cover a range of service currents from 15 to 2500 A.R 20. Undervoltage release . Fixed part . twopole. Starting from the fixed version circuit breaker. Front 4. T3. Racking out crank 28. in the fixed. Breaking unit (1) 2.24 The ABB family of molded case circuit breakers in conformity with UL 489 and CSA C22.SOR (2) 7. Direct rotary handle . all the other versions used for various requirements are obtained by means of mounting conversion kits. 5. Front terminal for copper-aluminium .MC 17. Rear orientated terminal . with an interrupting rating of 18 kA at 277 V AC.FLD (2) 9.is divided into different. Conversion kit for plug-in/draw out versions (2) 21.AUX (2) 5.FC CuAl (UL listed) 18.2 approval. Front extended spread terminal . The following are available: – kit for converting a fixed circuit breaker into the moving part of a plug-in and draw out one – circuit breaker fixed parts for plug-in and draw out circuit breakers – conversion kit for the connection terminals.RHE (2) 14.EF 16. Front terminal for copper cable .Tmax and Isomax .ES 19. The power distribution circuit breakers are available. Residual current release.RHD (2) 10. (1) (2) 1 25 26 27 28 1SDC210141F0023 UL file E93565 UL file E116596 ABB 1/3 . TT1 27. Early auxiliary contact . Key lock . Phase separators 25.AUP 24.

Attention to protection of the environment and to health and safety in the work place is another priority commitment for ABB and. construction. in respect of the European EN 45011 Standard. 1/4 ABB . according to OHSAS 18001 (British Standards). This certification has been integrated in 1999 with the Management System for Healt and Safety in the workplace. 062/2002). Selection of materials.2 No. Safety) issued by RINA. which guarantees the quality and that the circuit breaker is an original ABB product. 2006/95/CE (replaces 72/23/EEC and subsequent amendments) – “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive” (EMC) no.5. ABB .the first industry in the electromechanical section in Italy to obtain this recognition . The independent certifying Body is RINA S. in conformity with the international ISO 14001 Standard. installation and service) and with the equivalent European EN ISO 9001 and Italian UNI EN ISO 9001 Standards. QES (Quality. by the Italian certification body ACAE (Association for Certification of Electrical Apparatus). the company environmental management system has been certified by RINA in 1997. as confirmation of this.89/336 EEC.Construction characteristics Distinguishing features of the series Compliance with Standards and company Quality System 1 1SDC210142F0023 The Tmax and Isomax circuit breakers and their electrical accessories conform to the UL 489 (Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated) and CSA C22.1 (Canadian Standard Association) North American Standards.p. ABB’s commitment to safeguarding the environment is also shown in a concrete way by the Life Cycle Assessments of its products carried out directly by the ABB Research and Development in collaboration with the ABB Research Center. The ABB Quality System complies with the international ISO 9001 . and to the international IEC 60947-2 Standards and comply with the EC directive: – “Low Voltage Directives” (LVD) no. development.2000 Standard (model for quality assurance in design. obtained using special anti-imitation techniques.A. has been able to reduce the consumption of raw materials and waste from processing by 20%. obtaining one of the first certification of integrated management System. also foreseeing the possibility of its being recycled. The ABB test laboratory is accredited by SINAL (certificate no. Environment. and has now reached its fourth reconfirmation. The new Tmax series has a hologram on the front. Certification of compliance with the above-mentioned product Standards is carried out. a member of the European LOVAG organization (Low Voltage Agreement Group). ABB obtained its first certification with three-year validity in 1990.thanks to a revision of the production process with an eye to ecology. processes and packing materials is made optimising the true environmental impact of the product.

the circuit breaker guarantees circuit isolation in compliance with the IEC 60947-2 Standard. The oversized insulating distances guarantee there are no leakage currents and dielectric resistance to any overvoltages between input and output. Trip unit intervention automatically opens the moving contacts: to close them again. As a consequence most accessories are field installable. operating the circuit breaker in complete safety. the operating mechanism must be reset by pushing the operating lever from the intermediate position into the lowest open position. By means of special socket-plugs. the operating mechanism unit is completely insulated in relation to the powered circuits. thereby preventing any risk of contact with live parts. The circuit breaker operating mechanism has trip free operation. and. the power and auxiliary circuits are insulated. comply with what is foreseen by the UL 489 Standard and are higher than those required by the international IEC Standards. For plug in and draw out version circuit breakers. Furthermore. Isolation behaviour In the open position. The seat of each electrical accessory is completely segregated from the power circuit. 1SDC210145F0023 ABB 1SDC210144F0023 1/5 . the insulation distances. both between the live internal parts and in the terminal connection area.Double insulation* This construction characteristic consists of the presence of double insulation between the live power parts (excluding the terminals) and the front parts of the apparatus where the operator works during normal operation of the installation. in particular. it is possible to carry out blank tests under these conditions. in the racked-out position. O = Open. yellow-green line = Open due to release trip). thereby guaranteeing safe and reliable signals in compliance with the prescriptions of the IEC 60417-2 Standard (I = Closed. guaranteeing that no part is live. * Except for Isomax S8 1SDC210143F0023 1 Positive operation The operating lever always indicates the exact position of the circuit breaker moving contacts.

in the case of temperatures exceeding 104 °F (40 °C). L. The electronic PR211/P.Construction characteristics Distinguishing features of the series Operating temperature The Tmax and Isomax circuit breakers can be used in ambient conditions where the surrounding air temperature varies between –13 °F and +158 °F (–25 °C and +70 °C) and stored in ambient with temperatures between –40 °F and + 158 °F (–40 °C and +70 °C). For temperature above 158 °F (70 °C) the circuit breaker performances are not guaranteed. 1 1/6 1SDC210146F0023 ABB . with the same setting. there is a variation of the thermal threshold as shown in the tables on page 4/38 and 4/39. PR212/P. The circuit breakers fitted with thermomagnetic trip unit have their thermal element set for a reference temperature of 104 °F (40 °C). to take into account the heating phenomena which occur in the copper parts of the circuit breaker passed through by the phase current. For temperatures other than 104 °F (40 °C). must be reduced. PR221DS and the new PR222DS/P electronic trip units do not undergo any variations in performance as the temperature varies but. as indicated in the derating graphs on page 4/37. the maximum setting for protection against overloads.

atmospheric disturbances or electrical discharges. operation of the protections is guaranteed in the presence of interferences caused by electronic apparatus. dielectric resistance. This is in compliance with the IEC 60947-2 Appendix F Standards and European Directive No. For this reason. RC212. 89/336 regarding EMC – electromagnetic compatibility. PR212/P. cooling capacity and pressure. No interference with other electronic apparatus near the place of installation is generated either. RC222 and RC223 electronic residual current releases. PR221DS and PR222DS/P electronic trip units and the RC211.Altitude Up to an altitude of 6600 ft (2000 m) the Isomax and Tmax do not undergo any alterations in their rated performances. 1SDC210147F0023 ABB 1/7 . Altitude [ft] 6600 Rated voltage 9900 13200 16500 [V] 600 522 435 348 Continuous current rating % 100 98 93 90 1 Electromagnetic compatibility With the use of the PR211/P. As the altitude increases. the rated voltage and the nominal current at this altitudes must be derated to the values shown in the table. the atmospheric properties are altered in terms of composition. RC221.

free from hexavalent-cromium (ROHS-compliant). The Isomax and Tmax circuit breakers are also tested. the whole Tmax family has ABS approval according both with IEC 60947-2 and UL 489. – Fe/Zn 12 zinc-plating (ISO 2081) protected by a conversion layer. with the same corrosion resistance guaranteed by ISO 4520 class 2c. Please contact ABB for information regarding the types of circuit breakers approved. carrying out two cycles at 131 °F (55 °C) with the “variant 1” method (clause 6.3. 1/8 ABB .3). The suitability of their use under the most severe environmental conditions is therefore ensured with the hot-humid climate defined in climatograph 8 of the IEC 60721-2-1 Standards thanks to: – insulating cases made of synthetic resins reinforced with glass fibers. according to IEC 60947-2. in compliance with the IEC 60068-2-6 Standards and the regulations of the major classification organizations: – ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)* – RINA – Det Norske Veritas – Bureau Veritas – Lloyd’s register of shipping – Germanischer Lloyd. *Most of ABB circuit breakers are certified with ABS approval. to resist shocks up to 12g. – anti-corrosion treatment of the main metallic parts. the performances approved and their relative validity.Construction characteristics Distinguishing features of the series Tropicalization Circuit breakers and accessories in the ABB family of molded case circuit breakers have been tested in compliance with the IEC 60068-2-30 Standard. 1SDC210148F0023 1 Resistance to shocks and vibrations The circuit breakers are unaffected by vibrations generated mechanically and due to electromagnetic effects. according to the IEC 60068-2-27 Standard. – application of anti-condensation protection for electronic trip units and relative accessories.

thanks to the special fixing brackets. Racking-out with the door closed With Tmax T4 and T5 and Isomax S6 and S7 in the draw out version.76 inches (70 mm) takes Tmax T3 to the same standard as the two smaller sizes. facilitating the design stage and construction of the switchboard metalwork. above all thanks to the possibility of being supplied either by top or bottom terminals.Installation Molded case circuit breakers can be installed in the switchboards. it is possible to prepare standardised support structures. without jeopardising the apparatus functionality. without undergoing any derating of their rated characteristics(1). the circuit breaker can be racked-in and out with the compartment door closed. vertical or lying down position on the back plate or on rails. In fact. 1SDC210150F0023 1 (1) Isomax S8 can be mounted just in vertical position. Racking out can only be carried out with the circuit breaker open (for obvious safety reasons). the depth of 2. making assembly of circuit breakers up to 225 A in standard switchboards even simpler. ABB 1SDC210152F0023 1SDC210151F0023 1/9 . mounted in any horizontal. ABB circuit breakers can be installed easily in all types of switchboards. Furthermore. thereby increasing operator safety and allowing rationalisation of low voltage arc proof switchboards. T1. Apart from fixing on the base plate. using a special racking-out crank supplied with the conversion kit from fixed circuit breaker to moving part of draw out circuit breaker. T2 and T3 can also be installed on DIN 50022 rails.

.

........................................................................ 2/8 2 Motor control protection circuit breakers: MCP Magnetic and electronic trip units .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2/2 General characteristics ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2/4 Thermomagnetic trip units .... 2/20 ABB 2/1 ....................................................... 2/18 Molded case switches: MCS Electrical characteristics ................................................... 2/6 Electronic trip units ...The ranges Index Circuit breakers for power distribution Electrical characteristics ..........................................................

06 ■ 5.45 Note: for S6 4 poles only for N versions (1) In 15A = 10 kA @ 277 V AC.76-70 25000 2.76-70 25000 2.Circuit breakers for power distribution Electrical characteristics 2 Frame size Numbers of poles Rated voltage Test voltage (1min) 50-60 Hz Interrupting ratings [A] Nr (AC) 50-60Hz [V] (DC) [V] [V] [kA rms] 240 V AC [kA rms] 277 V AC [kA rms] 480 V AC [kA rms] 600Y/347 V AC [kA rms] 600 V AC [kA rms] 250 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] 500 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] 500 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] 600 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] Thermomagnetic Electronic H [in-mm] W [in-mm] D [in-mm] [operations] [lbs] T1 1P 100 1 277 3000 B 18 (1) 14 (1) T1 100 3-4 600Y/347 500 3000 N 50 (2) 22 (2) 10 25 25 T2 100 3-4 480 3000 S 65 35 H 150 65 T3 225 3-4 600Y/347 500 3000 N S 50 65 25 10 25 25 35 10 35 35 Trip units Dimensions fixed version (3p) ■ 5. 10 kA @ 600Y/347 V AC (2) In 15A = 35 kA @ 240 V AC 14 kA @ 480Y/277 V AC (3) T5 600 with electronic trip unit only (4) 2p breakers: available only in interrupting rating 2/2 ABB .12-130 3-76 2.76-70 25000 1.12-130 3.76-70 25000 5.54-90 2.12-130 1-25.4 2.13-105 2.86 ■ 5.9-150 4.34 Mechanical life Weights (fixed 3p) ■ ■ 5.

13/105 4.07/205 4.5 20000 8.51/140 4.07/205 5.98-406 9.55 100 65 35 20 50 65 35 50 ■ ■ 10.5 20000 22 ■ 16-406 8.18 100 65 25 16 35 25 50 65 35 50 ■ ■ 8.27-210 4.5 10000 37.07/103.5 ■ 15.07-103.45-138.25-235 10000 135 ABB 2/3 .55-268 8.27-210 5.75-400 15.5 20000 6.07-103.T4 250 2-3-4 (4) 600 600 3500 H L 150 200 65 35 100 65 T5 400-600 (3) 2-3-4 (4) 600 600 3500 S H L 100 150 200 35 25 65 35 100 65 S6 800 2-3-4 600 600 3000 H 150 65 35 S7 1200 2-3-4 600 3000 H 100 65 50 S8 1600-2000-2500 3 600 3000 V 125 100 85 2 N 65 25 18 S 100 35 25 V 200 150 100 N 65 25 18 V 200 150 100 N 65 50 25 L 200 100 42 25 16 35 25 50 65 35 50 ■ ■ 8.

with an application range from 15 to 2500 A and interrupting ratings up to 150 kA at 480 V AC.7…1 x In) and adjustable magnetic threshold (I3 = 5…10 x In). according to their own requirements and needs: in this case. This is a 100 A frame size circuit breaker. whereas selection of the overcurrent trip unit is made according to the type of application required. – T4. for the first time ABB has also developed a molded case circuit breaker with a single-pole construction characteristic: T1B 1p. T5 and Isomax S6 circuit breakers with TMA thermomagnetic trip units. T2. – Tmax T4 (up to 50 A) circuit breaker equipped with TMD thermomagnetic trip units with adjustable thermal threshold (I1 = 0. Thanks to their simplicity of assembly. able to operate at rated voltages up to 277 V AC. Trip unit TMF Circuit breakers In [A] 15 20 T4 250 ■ ■ T5 400 T5 600 PR222DS/P and PR222DS/ PD-A electronic trip units.7…1 x In) and fixed magnetic threshold (I3 = 10 x In). the following are available: – Tmax T1B 1p. PR221DS.1 Standards. correct TMD 30 ■ TMA 50 ■ 40 ■ 80 ■ 100 ■ 125 ■ 150 ■ 200 ■ 250 ■ 300 ■ 400 ■ ■ = complete circuit breaker already coded ▲ = circuit breaker to be assembled (separate codes of the circuit breaker part plus trip unit) 2/4 ABB . T1. Furthermore. the end customer can. – T2 with PR221DS electronic trip unit – T4 and T5 with PR221DS. 5. with adjustable thermal threshold (I1 = 0.2 No. For protection of alternating current networks. change the type of trip unit extremely rapidly. PR222DS/P and PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip unit – Isomax S6. with fixed thermal and magnetic threshold (I3 = 10 x In). S7 and S8 with PR211/P and PR212/P electronic trip unit. is divided into different sizes. equipped with TMF thermomagnetic trip units. in fact. complying with the UL 489 and CSA C22. Selection of the size allows the basic electrical characteristics to be identified simply and immediately. 20 A) circuit breakers.Circuit breakers for power distribution General characteristics General characteristics The ABB family of molded case circuit breakers. T3 and T4 (15 A. 2 Interchangeability Tmax T4 and T5 circuit breakers can be equipped either with TMD or TMA thermomagnetic trip units.

T2. T4 and T5 and Isomax S6 circuit breakers fitted with thermomagnetic trip units can also be used in direct current plants. Finally. 2 DC T1 T3 T4 T5 S6 TMF TMF TMF/TMD/TMA TMA TMA 15…100 60…225 15…250 300-400 800 TMF = Fixed thermomagnetic trip unit TMD = Thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal and fixed magnetic threshold TMA = Thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal and adjustable magnetic threshold ELT = Electronic trip unit assembly is under the customer’s responsibility. with an application range from 15 to 800 A and a minimum operating voltage of 24 V DC. Tmax T1. Above all.Range of application of the alternating and direct current circuit breakers Trip unit AC T1B 1p T1 T2 T3 T4 Range [A] T5 S6 S7 S8 TMF TMF TMF PR221DS TMF TMF/TMD/TMA PR221DS PR222DS/P PR222DS/PD-A TMA PR221DS PR222DS/P PR222DS/PD-A TMA PR211/P PR212/P PR211/P PR212/P PR212/P 15…100 15…100 15…100 25…100 60…225 15…250 100…250 100…250 100…250 300-400 300-400-600 300-400-600 300-400-600 600-800 400…800 400…800 1000-1200 1000-1200 1600…2500 Tmax T2 and T3 offer a magneticonly trip unit: I3 = 6…12 x In. this means into increased flexibility of use of the circuit breakers with considerable savings in terms of costs thanks to better rationalisation of stock management. T3. PR221DS-LS/I or I 100 ■ PR222DS/P-LSI or LSIG 600 100 ■ PR222DS/PD-A-LSI or LSIG 600 100 ▲ 150 ■ 250 ■ 300 ■ 400 ■ 150 ■ 250 ■ 300 ■ 400 ■ 150 ▲ 250 ▲ 300 ▲ 400 ▲ 600 ■ ■ ▲ ABB 2/5 .

T4 up to 20 A. T3. and protection against 2 Thermomagnetic trip unit TMF. TMA = thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal threshold (I1 = 0. adjustable threshold between 0. ABB . TMD and TMA TMD Thermal threshold Adjustable from 0.7…1 x In) and fixed magnetic threshold (I3 = 10 x In).7…1 x In) and adjustable magnetic threshold (I3 = 5…10 x In). T2.Circuit breakers for power distribution Thermomagnetic trip units Thermomagnetic trip units Tmax T1B 1p. T2.7÷ 1 x In for T4.7 to 1 x In Magnetic threshold Fixed (I3 = 10 x In) 1SDC210170F0023 TMA Thermal threshold Adjustable from 0. T1. T5 and S6). and Isomax S6 circuit breakers can be fitted with thermomagnetic trip unit and are used in protection of alternating current networks or direct current networks with a range of application from 15 A to 800 A. TMD = thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal threshold (I1 = 0. T1.7 to 1 x In Magnetic threshold Adjustable from 5 to 10 x In 2/6 1SDC210172F0023 TMF = thermomagnetic trip unit with fixed thermal threshold (I1 = In) and fixed magnetic thresold (I3 = 10 x In). made using the bimetal technique. T3. They allow protection against overloads with a thermal device (fixed threshold for T1B 1P. T4 and T5.

T3 and T4 up to 50 A. T3 I3 [A] Neutral [A] 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 600 600 700 700 800 800 900 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 900 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 T4.7. The four-pole circuit breakers are always supplied with the neutral protected by the trip unit and protection of the neutral at 100% of the phase setting.1xIn) T5 400 (I1=0.. adjustable threshold between 5÷10 x In for T4. S6 I3 [A] Neutral [A] 500 500 500 500 500 400 800 500 500 500 500 500 400 800 500 625 750 1000 2000 1000 2000 1250 1500 2000 3000 4000 2500 3000 4000 6000 8000 1250 1500 2000 3000 4000 2500 3000 4000 6000 8000 1000 1250 1500 500 625 750 1000 1250 1500 S6 I3 = 2. T5 and S6. Isomax S6 can also offer a fixed magnetic threshold of 2..5 x In [A] 1500 2000 ABB 2/7 .short-circuit with a magnetic device (fixed threshold for T1 1P. T1.7.7.1 x In) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2 35 35 40 40 ■ ■ ■ 15 15 ■ ■ 20 20 ■ ■ 25 25 ■ ■ 30 30 ■ ■ 50 50 ■ ■ 60 60 ■ ■ ■ 70 70 ■ ■ ■ 80 80 ■ ■ ■ 90 90 ■ ■ ■ 100 100 ■ ■ ■ 125 125 150 150 175 175 200 200 225 225 250 250 300 300 400 400 600 600 800 800 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ T1 I3 [A] Neutral [A] 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1000 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 T2.1xIn) S6 (I1=0...5 x In). T5. T2... Thermomagnetic trip units In [A] Neutral [A] T1 (I1=In) T2 (I1=In) T3 (I1=In) T4 (I1=In) T4 (I1=0.

. which acts directly on the circuit breaker operating mechanism unit.. and of a trip coil with demagnetisation.66 Hz able to measure harmonics up to 550 Hz IEC 60947-2 Annex F 2/8 ABB .. PR222DS/P. The electronic technology used to realise these trip units guarantees great reliability. The power supply required for correct operation is supplied directly by the trip units current transformers and tripping is always guaranteed. The current transformers are housed inside the trip unit box and supply the energy required for correct operation of the protection and the signal needed to detect the current. It is possible to test the trip coil by means of the TT1 device. the new PR222DS/P and PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip units. the protection unit (PR221DS. T4 and T5 circuit breakers for uses in alternating current can be equipped with PR221DS. A positive test will trip the breaker. S7 and S8 can be fitted with PR211/P and PR212/P. PR211/P or PR212/P). trip precision and immunity to electromagnetic components in compliance with the standards on the matter.+158 °F (-25 °C.Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units General characteristics Tmax T2.. They are available with primary rated current as indicated in the table. 2 Characteristics of PR221DS. PR211/P. PR222DS/PD-A. PR222DS/PD-A. PR222DS/P.+70 °C) 90% 45.. PR212/P electronic trip units Operating temperature Relative humidity Service Frequency Electromagnetic compatibility (LF and HF) -13 °F. Isomax S6. even under single-phase load conditions and in correspondence with the minimum setting. The protection trip units are made up of the current transformers (three or four depending on the number of conductors to be protected). On the other hand..

Current transformers PR221DS In [A] T2 T4 T5 400 T5 600 L S I 10…25 25…250 25…250 100 ■ 24…60 60…600 60…600 150 ■ 40…100 100…1000 100…1000 60…150 150…1500 150…1500 250 ■ ■ 40…100 60…1000 150…1200 20…100 400 ■ 160…400 600…4800 400 ■ 600 ■ 60…150 90…1500 225…1800 30…150 600 ■ 240…600 900…7200 800 ■ ■ 160…400 400…4000 600…4800 80…400 240…600 600…6000 900…7200 120…600 320…800 800…8000 1200…9600 160…800 400…1000 1000…10000 1500…12000 200…1000 ■ ■ 480…1200 1200…12000 1800…14400 240…1200 640…1600 1600…16000 2400…19200 320…1600 ■ 800…2000 2000…20000 3000…24000 400…2000 ■ 1000…2500 2500…25000 3750…30000 500…2500 1000 100…250 150…2500 375…3000 50…250 800 ■ ■ 320…800 1200…9600 1200 400…1000 1500…12000 1600 2000 ■ 480…1200 1800…14400 2500 120…300 180…3000 450…3600 60…300 1000 ■ 160…400 240…4000 600…4800 80…400 ■ 240…600 360…6000 900…7200 120…600 1200 100…250 250…2500 250…2500 300 120…300 300…3000 300…3000 160…400 400…4000 400…4000 400 25 ■ 60 ■ 100 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 240…600 600…6000 600…6000 600 150 250 300 400 600 PR222DS/P or In [A] PR222DS/PD-A T4 T5 400 T5 600 L S I G 2 PR211/P In [A] S6 S7 L I PR212/P In [A] S6 S7 S8 L S I G ABB 2/9 .

On the other side. 2 PR221DS-LS/I Protection S Against short-circuit with delayed trip Dip-switches for setting the neutral (only for T4 and T5) Socket for TT1 test unit Protection L Against overload Protection I 1SDC210173F0023 Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip 2/10 ABB . the trip unit is interchangeable. Alternatively. available for T2. the version with only the function of protection against instantaneous short-circuit I is available (version PR221DS-I). and it is possible to select between 2 trip curves 3s at 6 x I1 and 6s at 6 x I1. protection against overload L can be set manually at I1 = 0. The PR221DS for Tmax T2 has some differences if compared with the one used with T4 and T5.4…1 x In with 16 thresholds by means of a dip switch and it is possible to select between 2 different trip curves 3s at 6 x I1 and 12s at 6 x I1. protection L can be set manually at I1 = 0. you can choose between protection S or I simply by moving the dip-switch. T4 and T5 The PR221DS trip unit.4…1 x In. T4 and T5.Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units PR221DS . and short-circuit S or I (version PR221DS-LS/I): with this version.Tmax T2. furthermore. provides protection functions against overload L. With Tmax T2. the trip unit is not interchangeable. with Tmax T4 and T5. with 16 thresholds by means of a dip switch on the front of the circuit breaker.

the following tolerances hold: Trip time S I ± 20 % ≤ 40ms (2) (3) For T5 In = 600 A ⇒ I2 max = 9.96 .84 0.1 x In Release between 1.68 0. T5 CANNOT BE EXCLUDED Tolerance: CAN BE EXCLUDED Against short-circuit with inverse short time delay trip and trip characteristic with inverse time (I2t=constant) (selectable as an alternative to protection function I) Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip (selectable as an alternative to protection function S) Tolerance: ± 10% up to 6 x In (T4-T5) ± 20% above 6 x In (T4-T5) ± 20% (T2) istantaneous CAN BE EXCLUDED (1) These tolerances hold in the following conditions: – self-powered relay at full power and/or auxiliary supply. 0.0.0.2 .3 .0. In conditions other than those considered.1.5 .25s at 6 x I1 t1 = 12s only for T4.5 .3.7.1..5 x In ABB 2/11 .72 .5 . 50% or 100% directly from the front of the trip unit by means of the specific dip switch.5 . whereas for T4 and T5 it is possible to select the protection threshold OFF.5 .0.44 .8 .5 .6.0.92 .64 .3 .5 .5 .7 .2 .3.80 .3 x I1 (IEC 60947-2 and UL 489) I2 = 1 .5 . Concerning to neutral protection.0.7.6.25s at 8 x In).1.48 . with inverse short time delay and trip characteristic with inverse time (I2t = const).52 0.0. 2 PR221DS .2.8.5 5.5 .2. ± 20% above 6 x In at 8 x In t2 = 0.1s at 8 x In t2 = 0..8 .1s at 8 x In. The protection function against instantaneous short-circuit I can be adjusted to I3 = 1…10 x In with 15 thresholds.5 x In For T5 In = 600 A ⇒ I3 max = 9.9 10 x In (3) Tolerance: ± 10% (T4-T5) ± 20% (T2) Trip curves(1) at 6 x I1 t1 = 3s at 6 x I1 t1 = 6s only for T2 ± 10% up to 6 x In. The protection time delay can be selected by adjusting the dip switches on one of the two available curves (0.5 .8.88 .5 .0.4.9 10 x In (2) Tolerance: ± 10% (T4-T5) ± 10% up to 2 x In (T2) ± 20% above 2 x In (T2) I3 = 1 .1. This protection is selectable as an alternative to protection function I. for Tmax T2 the protection of the neutral is set to 100% of the phase protection setting.0.56 .0.5 .0.60 .Protection functions and settings Protection functions Against overload with long inverse time delay trip and trip characteristic according to an inverse time curve (I2t=constant) Trip threshold I1 = 0.The protection function against short-circuit with delayed trip S. – two or three-phase power supply.40 . can be set to I2 = 1…10 x In with 15 thresholds.76 .7 .4.5 5.5 .

05 and 0.5s at 8 x In) or electronically by means of PR010T between 0. Function L.1 x In). Furthermore. delayed S and instantaneous I shortcircuit (version PR222DS/P-LSI) and.6…10 x In with 15 thresholds by means of the dip switches or electronically by means of the PR010T test and configuration unit. The time delay of the protection can be selected either manually by adjusting the dip switch to one of the 4 curves available (with delay of 0. and 18s at 6 x I1 for all the other settings. with 95 thresholds (steps of 0.1s at 8 x In. or to set the trip time electronically between 0.2s at 2. can be set manually to I1 = 0. 50% or 100% directly from the front of the release by means of the specific dip switch. Concerning to neutral protection. available for T4 and T5.8s at 1.01s). The function of protection against earth fault G is adjustable either manually. 6s at 6 x I1. 0. it is possible to select among 4 different trip curves: 3s at 6 x I1.1 s at 3.01s). I also has protection against earth fault G (version PR222DS/P-LSIG).1 and 0.05s at 8 x In. to I4 = 0.6 x I4 and 0. with 86 thresholds (steps of 0.25 x I4. The pre-alarm threshold value is equal to 0.25 x I4. alternatively.Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units PR222DS/P . on the front of the trip unit. as well as the functions L. has protection functions against overload L.8s with 71 thresholds (steps of 0.25s at 8 x In or 0. It is also possible to select among 4 different trip curves: 0. 12s at 6 x I1 for T4 In = 250 A and T5 = 600 A. it is possible to select the protection threshold OFF.25 x I4.5…12 x In with 15 thresholds. The protection function against short-circuit with delayed trip S. by means of dip switches. The protection function against instantaneous short-circuit I can be adjusted to I3(1) = 1. which cannot be excluded. 0. 0.Tmax T4 and T5 The PR222DS/P trip unit. 9s at 6 x I1.5s at 8 x In with 46 thresholds (steps of 0. with 7 thresholds or electronically with PR010T.01 In). by means of the dip switches or electronically by means of the PR010T test and configuration unit.4s at 1.9 x I1 (cannot be modified or excluded). with 81 thresholds (steps of 0. Furthermore. signalling of pre-alarm and alarm of protection L is available.2…1 x In. with inverse short time delay and trip characteristic with inverse time (I2t = const) can be set to I2 = 0. S. 0.01 In). 2 (1) For T5 In = 600 A ⇒ I3max = 10 x In 2/12 ABB .1 x In).4…1 x In with 32 thresholds by means of the dip switches or electronically by means of the PR010T test and configuration unit: in this case the thresholds are 61 (steps of 0.

delayed S and instantaneous I short-circuit (version PR222DS/ PD-A-LSI) or.PR222DS/PD-A Apart from the protection functions against overload L. alternatively. available for T4 and T5.Electrical characteristics Auxiliary power supply (galvanically insulated) Maximum ripple Inrush current @ 24 V Rated current @ 24 V Rated power @ 24 V PR222DS/PD-A 24 V DC ± 20% 5% 1 A for 30 ms 100 mA 2. the PR222DS/PD-A trip unit. in the protections and all the alarams (1) plus the extra protection G (version PR222/PD-A-LSIG). All the information provided by the trip unit (measurement functions. remote) Protection parameters set Alarms Protections: L. also has the dialogue unit integrated with PR222DS/P PR222DS/PD-A Modbus RTU standard EIA RS485 19200bps ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Modbus RTU protocol. The devices use the EIA RS485 standard as the physical means for data transmission at a maximum transmission speed of 19200 bit/sec. G Release control for failed fault Maintenance Total number of operations Total number of trips Number of trip tests Number of manual operations Number of trips for each individual protection function Record of last trip data Safety function Automatic opening in the case of failed release for fault (with motor operator) Events Changes in circuit breaker state. and remotely by means of supervision and control systems. 2 ■ Typical contact: MOS photo Vmax: 48 V DC/30 V AC Imax: 50 mA DC/35 mA AC Auxiliary power supply . I. maintenance data. PR222PD allows Tmax T4 and T5 circuit breakers to be integrated in a communication network based on the Modbus RTU protocol. S. The PR222DS/PD-A trip unit can be associated with the AUX-E auxiliary contacts in electronic version. state of the circuit breaker) can be consulted both locally. If the power for protection function is supplied directly by the current transformers of the release. Communication functions Protocol Physical medium Speed (maximum) Measurement functions Phase currents Neutral Earth Signalling functions L pre-alarm and alarm LED L alarm output contact (1) Data available State of the circuit-breaker (open.5 W ABB 2/13 . alarms. communication is only possible with an auxiliary power supply of 24 V DC. directly on the front of the circuit breaker. closed) Mode (local. to know the state of the circuit breaker (open/ closed).

Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units PR222DS/P Protection S Against short-circuit with delayed trip Protection I Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip Protection L Against overload Protection G Socket for test TT1 test unit Against earth fault Dip-switches for setting the neutral 2 Socket for connection of PR010/T test unit 1SDC210174F0023 Selection for electronic or manual setting PR222DS/PD-A Protection S Against short-circuit with delayed trip Protection I Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip Protection L Against overload Protection G Socket for test TT1 test unit Socket for connection of PR010/T test unit Against earth fault Dip-switches for setting the neutral 1SDC210780F0023 Selection for electronic or manual setting 2/14 ABB .

10 x I4 t4 = 0.6 .25s t2 = 0.8s Electronic setting t4 = 0.5…12 x In (step 0.3 x I1 (IEC 60947-2 and UL 489) Against short-circuit with inverse short time delay trip and trip characteristic with inverse time (I2t= constant) or definite time Manual setting I2 = 0.0.2…1 x In (step 0.50 .0 7.5s for T5 In = 600 A ⇒ I3max = 9.5.05…0.86 0.66 .60…10 x In (step 0.68 0.10 x In (3) I2t=const ON Electronic setting I2 = 0.1.96 .84 0.1.48 .76 0.5 .0.78 0.4.6.98 .5s)(2) Tolerance: ± 10% 2 at 8 x In t2 = 0.52 0.75 .2 .5 .6 .5 ..25 .40…1 x In (step 0.55 0.12 x In (3) Electronic setting at 6 x I1 t1 = 3…18s (step 0.3.1 x In) (3) Tolerance: ± 10% Manual setting I3 = 1.0.6 .1 x In Electronic setting I4 = 0.56 .0.5s (step 0.6. – two or three-phase power supply In conditions other than those considered.9 9.05s t2 = 0.8 .0.4s up to 1.5s Manual setting at 8 x In at 8 x In t2 = 0.58 .42 .70 0.8 x In (step 0.0.0.0.1s t2 = 0.01s) Tolerance: ± 10% (4) Manual setting t2 = 0.1 x In 0.Protection functions and settings Protection functions Against overload with long inverse time delay trip and trip characteristic according to an inverse time curve (I2t= constant) Trip threshold Manual setting I1 = 0.7.6 .4 .1s at 8 x In t2 = 0.5 .0.8..4 .2 .6 .74 .1. the following tolerances hold: Trip time S G ± 20 % ± 20 % for T5 In = 600 A ⇒ t1 = 10.8 .60 0.4.4.5 .1.54 0.4 .8.10 x In (3) I2t=const OFF Electronic setting I2 = 0.9.8 .80 .90 .60…10 x In (step 0.2.5 .5 x In I2max = 9.1s t4 = 0.1s ABB 2/15 .0.46 0.4 .82 .2 ..8 .8 .0.0.0 3.1.7.25s CAN BE EXCLUDED Electronic setting at 8 x In t2 = 0.9.6 x I4 t4 = 0.0.5 x In (4) tolerance: ± 10 ms up to t2 = 0.1.0.01 x In) Release between 1.5 .44 0.PR222DS/P and PR222DS/PD-A .01s) Tolerance: ± 10%(4) Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip CAN BE EXCLUDED istantaneous Electronic setting I3 = 1.8 .2s CAN BE EXCLUDED up to 1.2 .6 .64 .8.7.8.01s) Tolerance: ± 20% (2) (3) (1) These tolerances hold in the following conditions: – self-powered relay at full power and/or auxiliary supply.94 - Trip curves(1) Manual setting at 6 x I1 at 6 x I1 t1 = 3s t1 = 6s at 6 x I1 t1 = 9s at 6 x I1 t1 = 18s(2) CANNOT BE EXCLUDED Electronic setting I1= 0.4 .72 .45 .6.0.3 .05…0.0.2.3.5s Electronic setting t2 =0.2 .8 .1.01 x In) Tolerance: ± 10% Manual setting up to up to 3.7 .4 .1 x In) (3) Tolerance: ± 10% Manual setting I2 = 0.0 3.1 x In) (3) Tolerance: ± 10% Against earth fault with inverse short time delay trip and trip characteristic according to an inverse time curve (I2t= constant) Manual setting I4 = 0.25 x I4 t4 = 0..62 0.5s (step 0.2 .0.4 .0 7.5.5 5.0.15 x I4 2.8 .0.2 .05s t2 = 0.10.2.5 .92 0.40 .88 .0.

Isomax S6. and against earth fault G.5…12 x In by means of the dip switches. delayed short-circuit S and instantaneous short-circuit I. 6s at 6 x I1.4…1 x In by means of the dip switches on the front of the circuit-breaker. which cannot be excluded.Isomax S6 and S7 PR211/P trip unit (available for Isomax S6 and S7) provides protection functions against overload L and instantaneous short-circuit I. and is available in the versions with functions I and LI. Neutral protection is set to 50% of the phase protection. can be set manually to I1 = 0. 2 PR212/P .Circuit breakers for power distribution Electronic trip units PR211/P . Ask ABB for the 100% version. The protection function against instantaneous short-circuit I can be adjusted to I3 = 1. Function L. PR211/P Protection L Against overload Socket for TT1 test unit Protection I Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip PR212/P Protection I Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip Dip-switch for setting the neutral 1SDC210466F0003 Protection S Against short-circuit with delayed trip Protection G Against earth fault Socket for connection of PR010/T Test unit Selection for electronic or manual setting 1SDC210467F0003 Protection L Against overload Socket for TT1 test unit 2/16 ABB . It is available in the versions PR212/P with functions LSI and LSIG. S7 and S8 PR212/P trip unit (available from Isomax S6 to S8) provides protection functions against overload L. it is possible to select among 4 different trip curves: 3s at 6 x I1. Furthermore. 12s at 6 x I1 and 18s at 6 x I1.

0.25s at 8 x In t2 = 0. 12s at 6 x I1 and 18s at 6 x I1.PR211/P 0.0.8 . The protection functions against instantaneous short-circuit I and earth fault G can be adjusted respectively to I3 = 1.05…1.3 -0.6 .0.875 0. can be set manually to I1 = 0.9 .7 .5s at 8 x In) or electronically by means of PR010T between 0.925 .4 . with inverse short time delay and trip characteristic with inverse time (I2t = const).5 . available with Modbus or LON communication protocols.1s (tolerance: + 20% ) t2 = 0.8 .2 .3 .975 1 x In .Protection functions and settings Protection function Against overload with inverse long time delay and trip characteristic according to a time dependent CANNOT BE 2 EXCLUDED curve (I t = constant) Trip threshold I1 = 0.0. 0.10 x In Tolerance ± 10% I2 = 1 .8 .8 .25 x I4 2.25 x I4 t4 = 100ms t4 = 200ms t4 = 400ms t4 = 800ms (tolerance: + 20% ) ABB 2/17 .25s at 8 x In or 0. 0. thanks to the use of the PR212/D (IEC only) dialogue unit.7 .4 .1s (tolerance: + 20% ) at 8 x In t2 = 0.5…12 x In and I4 = 0.25 x I4 1. Furthermore.5 .Function L.0. The protection function against short-circuit with delayed trip S.2 .5s Against short-circuit with adjustable instantaneous trip CAN BE EXCLUDED I3 = 1.30 x I1 (IEC 60947-2 and UL 489) Trip curves A B C D at 6 x I1 at 6 x I1 at 6 x I1 at 6 x I1 t1 = 3s t1 = 6s t1 = 12s t1 = 18s (tolerance: + 10% up to 2 x In.0.4 .4 .12 x In Tolerance ± 20% istantaneous CAN BE EXCLUDED Against earth fault with short inverse time delay and trip characteristic according to a dependent time curve (I2t = constant) I4 = 0.4…1 x In by means of the dip switches on the front of the circuit-breaker.05s at 8 x In.0.95 1 x In .05s t2 = 0.0.6 .0. Setting the adjustment parameters of the protection functions is carried out directly from the front of the trip unit or remotely.5s t2 = 0.0.0.05s t2 = 0.0.0. it is possible to select among 4 different trip curves: 3s at 6 x I1.1s at 8 x In.75 . protection of the neutral can be set to 50% or 100% of the phase protection setting.5s at 8 x In.8 .10 . which cannot be excluded.05 and 0.0. 2 PR211/P and PR212/P . The time delay of the protection can be selected either manually by adjusting the dip switch to one of the 4 curves available (with delay of 0.6 .6 x I4 1.0.0.95 .65 0.25s t2 = 0.0.2…1 x In.55 . by means of dip-switches on the front of the trip unit.2 .3 .10 x In Tolerance ± 10% at 8 x In at 8 x In t2 = 0.6 . + 20% above 2 x In) Against short-circuit with inverse short time delay and trip characteristic with dependent time CAN BE (I2t = constant) or indeEXCLUDED pendent time I2 = 1 .5 . 6s at 6 x I1.85 .6 . can be set to I2 = 1…10 x In by means of the dip switches or electronically by means of the PR010T test and configuration unit.0.0.4 .6 .4 .0.9 1xIn Tolerance ± 20% up to up to up to up to 3.PR212/P Release between 1. by means of the dip switches or electronically by means of the PR010T.2 .8 . For four-pole circuit breakers.

All this has to take into account the problems that arise at the moment of the motor starting. The traditional system used for this purpose is based on three different devices: a circuit breaker for protection against short-circuit. different factors must be taken into consideration. a thermal relay for protection against overload and phase loss or unbalance of phase. In particular.Motor control protection circuit breakers: MCP Magnetic and electronic trip units General characteristics MCP circuit breakers are used to protect three phase asynchronous motors. such as: – the motor power – the diagram and type of starting – the type of motor: with cage rotor or with wound rotor – the fault current at the point of the network where the motor is installed. and a contactor for motor switching. when selecting these devices. 2 MCP Frame size Poles Ratings Interrupting ratings 240 V AC 480 V AC 600Y/347 V AC 600 V AC 500 V DC 600 V DC Trip unit Adjustable magnetic only (6…12 x In) Electronic PR221DS-I PR211/P-I T2 100 3 20…100 S H 65 150 35 65 T3 225 3 100…200 S 65 35 10 35 T4 250 3 100-150-250 N S H L 65 100 150 200 25 35 65 100 18 25 35 65 T5 400-600 3 300-400-600 N S H L 65 100 150 200 25 35 65 100 18 25 35 65 S6 800 3 800 N H L 65 150 200 50 65 100 25 35 42 S7 1200 3 1000-1200 H 100 65 50 S8 1600-2000-2500 3 1600-2000-2500 V 120 100 85 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2/18 1SDC210178F0023 ABB .

5 .10 .2 .4.5 . protection I is adjustable between 1…10 x In.3.8 .5 . PR221DS-I for Tmax T2. Electronic trip units In [A] T2 T4 T5 S6 S7 S8 Trip current function I I3 [A] 25 ■ 60 ■ 100 ■ ■ 150 ■ 250 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 300 400 600 800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 2 25 ÷ 250 60 ÷ 600 100 ÷ 1000 150 ÷ 1500 250 ÷ 2500 300 ÷ 3000 400 ÷ 4000 600 ÷ 6000 1200 ÷ 1600 1500 ÷ 12000 1800 ÷ 14400 2400 ÷ 19200 3000 ÷ 24000 3750 ÷ 30000 PR221DS-I (Tmax T2.5 .Magnetic only trip unit In [A] T2 I3 = 6…12 x In T3 I3 [A] 120…240 300…600 20 ■ 50 ■ 100 ■ ■ 600…1200 ■ 750…1500 ■ 900…1800 ■ 1200…2400 125 150 200 ABB 2/19 .7 . S7 and S8.1.12 x In Tolerance ± 20% MA .5…12 x In. whereas the range for PR211/P is 1.3 .5 .Protection functions and settings Protection function Against short-circuit with adjustable instantaneous trip Trip threshold I3 = 1.9 .ABB offers two different protection types: – a magnetic only trip unit (MA) for Tmax T2 and T3. For PR221DS-I.5.6.2.7.6 .5 .5 .5 . with adjustable threshold between 6…12 x In – an electronic trip unit with only an instantaneous short-circuit protection function I.8.8 .Protection functions and settings Protection function Against short-circuit with adjustable instantaneous trip Trip threshold I3 = 1 . and PR211/P-I for Isomax S6.10 x In Tolerance ± 20% PR211/P (Isomax S6…S8) .2 .5 .4 . T4 and T5. T4 and T5) .

as switching and isolation parts for lines. versions. fixing systems and the possibility of mounting accessories. All the molded case switches in accordance with UL 489 and CSA C22. whereas the 2500 A size is only available in the threepole version. of which they keep the overall dimensions. The MCS up to 1200 A are available in three-pole and four-pole versions. They can be part of general isolation devices of groups of machines or of complexes for motor operation and protection. busbars or groups of apparatus. The MCS are derived from the corresponding circuit breakers. 2 MCS Rating [A] Poles [No] Magnetic override [A] Rated Voltage AC (50-60 Hz) [V] DC [V] T1N-D 100 3-4 1000 600Y/347 500 T3S-D 150 3-4 1500 600Y/347 500 T3S-D 225 3-4 2250 600Y/347 500 T4N-S-H-L-V-D T5N-S-H-L-V-D 250 3-4 3000 600 600 400 3-4 5000 600 600 6000 600 S6H-D 800 3-4 8000 10000 600 600 600 S7H-D 1200 3-4 20000 600 600 S8V-D 2500 3 35000 600 600 2/20 ABB .Molded case switches: MCS Electrical characteristics General characteristics The MCS can be used as general circuit breakers in sub-switchboards. or as bus-ties.2 Standards are self protected.

........................ 3/14 Electrical signals .................................................................... 3/48 Controller for automatic transfer switch ..............................ATS010 (IEC only) ..........................IEC only ................................................................................................. 3/38 Accessories for electronic trip units ...... 3/42 Installation and testing accessories ................................................................................................. 3/49 3 ABB 3/1 ....................................................................................................................... 3/7 Service releases ................................................................................................................................ 3/47 Spare parts ...................................................................................................................................Accessories Index Versions and types ...................................................................... 3/3 Connection terminals ............................................................................................................... 3/20 Remote controls ................................................................. 3/26 Operating mechanisms with locks ........... 3/31 Residual current releases ..................................................................................................................

Accessories 3 1SDC210200F0023 3/2 ABB .

obtained from the fixed circuit breaker with addition of the isolating contacts (in correspondence with the connection terminals). UVR. in accordance with UL/CSA standards up to 2500 A.77” (45 mm) up to 225 A – possibility of assembly on back plate or on DIN rail up to 225 A (except T1B 1p) – thermomagnetic or electronic trip units – UL file: E93565 for circuit breakers and MCP. of the rear frame (for fixing the fixed part). The circuit breakers have: – single depth of 2. MOS.5 mm) from 150 to 800 A – standardized front 1. are available in the two-pole. Circuit breaker removal is carried out by unscrewing the top and bottom fixing screws. AUX-E. 1SDC210201F0023 3 Plug-in The plug-in version circuit breaker consists of: – fixed part to be installed directly on the back plate of the cubicle – moving part.76” (70 mm) up to 225 A and 4. CSA file: LR54280 – UL file: E116595 for MCS. A special lock prevents circuit breaker racking in and racking out with the contacts in the closed position. can be changed into the various types using the conversion kits. the socketplug connectors or the adapters for isolation of the relative auxiliary circuits must also be ordered. starting from the fixed version. and of the terminal covers. T4 and T5 circuit breakers. MOE. CSA file: LR54280. ABB 1SDC210202F0023 3/3 .Accessories Versions and types Fixed Fixed ABB molded case circuit breakers. When the circuit breaker has electrical accessories mounted (SOR. Tmax T2 T3. three-pole and four-pole version up to 1200 A and only in the three-pole version from 1600 A up to 2500 A.07” (103. AUX. AUE and RC222).

increasing the safety of the operation. Racking-in/racking-out of the moving part is carried out by means of the special crank supplied with the conversion kit of the fixed circuit breaker into moving part of draw out circuit breaker. obtained from the fixed circuit breaker with addition of the isolating contacts (in correspondence with the connection terminals). The draw out version T4 and T5 circuit breaker can only be fitted with pre-cabled electrical accessories. The special mechanism allows the circuit breaker to be racked out in the isolated position (with power and auxiliary circuits disconnected) with the compartment door closed.Accessories Versions and types Draw out The draw out version circuit breaker consists of: – fixed part to be installed directly on the back plate of the cubicle with the side group mounted on the fixed part to allow the racking-out/racking-in movement – moving part. application of one of these accessories allows the circuit breaker lock to be made in the withdrawn position. with selection between front flange for lever operating mechanism. the circuit breaker can be operated in open or closed position and. blank operating tests of the auxiliary control circuits can be carried out. motor operator and rotary handle operating mechanism. of the rear frame (for fixing the fixed part). 3 1SDC210203F0023 Versions available F Fixed T1B 1p T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 S6 S7 S8 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ P Plug-in – – ■ ■ ■ ■ – – – W Draw out – – – – ■ ■ ■ ■ – 3/4 ABB . by means of the special connectors. Once racked out or removed. provided with ADP adapters suitable for isolation of the relative auxiliary circuits. and of the terminal covers – accessory to be mounted on the front of the circuit breaker.

ABB 1SDC210208F0023 3/5 1SDC210209F0023 . alternatively. T3. with one of the following accessories: – front for lever operating mechanism – rotary handle operating mechanism – motor operator – terminal covers in order to prevent the racking-out operation with the circuit breaker closed. The circuit breaker is completed with the fixed part. The circuit breakers in the draw out version must be completed. The kit consists of: – isolating contacts – anti-racking out safety device – assembly nuts and screws – terminals covers. T5 and Isomax S6 and S7 (UL file: E116596 for Tmax) This allows the fixed circuit breaker with front terminals to be converted into the moving part of a draw out circuit breaker. T2-T3 1SDC210204F0023 3 1SDC210205F0023 1SDC210206F0023 1SDC210207F0023 T4-T5 T2-T3 T4-T5 Conversion kit into moving part of draw out circuit breaker for Tmax T4. The circuit breaker is completed with the fixed part. The kit consists of isolating contacts. T4 and T5 (UL file: E116596) Allows conversion of a fixed circuit breaker with front terminals into the moving part of a plug-in circuit breaker. frame.Conversion kit into part of plug-in for T2. and assembly nuts and screws.

FC Cu and FC CuAl terminals. For Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers. The fixed parts with EF terminals. terminal covers and phase separators. codes of fixed parts are available with different types of terminals (EF. can be also equipped with ES. 1SDC210212F0023 3/6 ABB . there are two guides.Accessories Versions and types Fixed part (UL file: E116596 for Tmax) The fixed part completes the circuit breaker in the plug-in or draw out version. 1SDC210211F0023 Racking out crank This allows racking out and racking in of the circuit breaker in the draw out version into the fixed part. The crank handle is the same for the whole range of circuit breakers and is automatically supplied with the fixed part of draw out circuit breakers or with the conversion kit for fixed part of plug-in into fixed part of draw out. The fixed part for draw out version is fitted with a guide for supporting the moving part during the isolation or withdrawal operations. With Tmax T4 and T5. For Tmax T2 and T3 circuit breakers. with the door closed. in the standard version. For plug-in or draw out version circuit breakers. removed. used for the fixed circuit breakers. with front terminals (F): a distinguishing characteristic of these two sizes of circuit breakers is the possibility of equipping the fixed parts with the same kit of terminals. different positions are available: – plug-in: plugged-in. VR). 3 1SDC210210F0023 Conversion kit for fixed part of plug-in into fixed part of draw out for Tmax T4 and T5 (UL file: E116596) A guide for converting the fixed part of a plug-in version circuit breaker into the fixed part of a draw out version circuit breaker is available for Tmax T4 and T5 circuit breakers. unplugged – draw out version: racked-in/racked-out. the fixed parts are available. moreover. HR.

1SDC210213F0023 ABB 1SDC210214F0023 3/7 . of plug-in or draw out circuit breakers for T4. The torque values to be applied to the tightening screws for cable terminals and to the screws used to connect the busbars to the flat bar terminals are given.Accessories Connection terminals The basic version of the circuit breakers is supplied with: – lugs for copper and aluminium cables (FC CuAl) or lugs for copper cables (FC Cu) for the Tmax T1 circuit breaker – front terminals (F) for Tmax T2. Flat bars of different size and composition are recommended for connections with busbars. and. FC Cu and FC CuAl terminals. which allow connection of cables or busbars by acting directly from the front of the circuit breaker – rear terminals. allowing the circuit breaker to be connected to the plant in the most suitable way for the installation requirements. T4 and T5 the rear terminals are adjustable. T4. fixed part with EF terminals can be equipped also with ES. S6 and S7 circuit breakers. For Tmax T2. HR or VR terminals. The information needed to make the connections is given for each type of terminal on page 3/9 and following. guarantee IP40 degree of protection – terminal covers for fixed parts. The following are available: – low terminal covers (LTC). The minimum and maximum cross-section of the cables. The required minimum depth is also indicated. On the other hand. front extended. 3 Insulating terminal covers The terminal covers are applied to the terminals of the circuit breaker to prevent accidental contact with live parts. Terminals are available for direct connection of bare copper or aluminium cables (UL listed) and terminals for connection of busbars or cables terminated with cable terminals. The degrees of protection indicated are valid for circuit breaker installed in switchboards. T3. S7 and S8 circuit breakers. which allow installation in switchboards with rear access to both cable and busbar connections. moreover. the proper terminal covers (TC-FP) are available. for fixed circuit breakers with front. T4 and T5 fixed part can mount EF. They are available in a single version. The following distinctions can be made between: – front terminals. The fixed parts of plug-in T2 and T3 circuit breakers can use the same terminal covers as the corresponding fixed circuit breakers. T5 and Isomax S6. front for cables and rear terminals. which guarantee IP40 degree of protection for fixed circuit breakers with rear terminals and for moving parts of plug-in or draw out circuit breakers – high terminal covers (HTC). guarantee IP40 degree of protection on the front with moving part connected. are indicated for connection with bare cables. bottom of a different type). An important feature of the Tmax T2 and T3 circuit breakers is that all the different types of terminals can be mounted either on the fixed version circuit breaker or on the fixed part of the plug-in circuit breaker. T3. T5. Different types of terminals are also available and these can be combined in various ways (top of one type. which can be tightened in the terminals and the diameter of the terminal. if it is different to the one recommended. For fixed parts of T4 and T5 400.

94” (100 mm) high – 7. a special kit is available on request to reach IP40 degree of protection from the front of the circuit breaker.Accessories Connection terminals Phase separating partitions These allow the insulation characteristics between the phases at the connections to be increased.87” (200 mm) are standard with the front extended spread type of terminals (ES). T4 and T5. T3. They are mounted from the front.94” (100 mm) phase separators are supplied as standard with front extended type terminals (EF). Two versions are available for Tmax circuit breakers: – 3. it is possible to mount the phase separating partitions between two circuit breakers or fixed parts side by side. 3 1SDC210215F0023 Screws for sealing the terminal covers 1SDC210216F0023 These are applied to the terminal covers of fixed circuit breakers or to the moving parts of plug-in or draw out circuit breakers. The H = 3. They prevent removal of both the high and low terminal covers and can be locked with a wire and lead seal. With the phase separating partitions mounted.87” (200 mm) high. 1SDC210217F0023 Kit for taking up the auxiliary power supply Special kits are available with the Tmax T2. Moreover. They are incompatible with both the high and low insulating terminal covers. Phase separating partitions must always be requested for Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers. The fixed parts of plug-in Tmax circuit breakers can use the same phase separating partitions as the corresponding fixed circuit breakers. whereas those with H = 7. even with the circuit breaker already installed. 3/8 ABB . They can only be combined with the front terminals for copper cables (FC Cu) or with the front terminals (F) for T3. They are always an alternative to the high or low terminal covers. T4 and T5 circuit breakers for taking up the auxiliary power supply directly from the connection terminals.

Connection terminals F EF ES FC Cu FC CuAl(1) R RC HR VR MC Front Extended front Front extended spread Front for copper cables F(2) F-P F-P F-P-W F-P-W Front for copper and aluminium cables(3) F(2) F-P F-P F-P-W F-P-W F F (5) Rear(4) Rear for Cu/Al cables Rear flat horizontal F Rear flat vertical Multi-cable terminals T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 S6 S7 S8 (1) (2) F .98-25 0.F T1-T5 1SDC210229F0023 S6 1SDC210230F0023 S7 1SDC210230F0023 Allow connection of busbars or cables terminated with cable terminals Type T2 T3 T4 T5 S6 S7 S8 2000 S8 2500 Version F-P F-P F F F F F F Pieces 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 Busbars/cable terminals [in-mm] Tightening [Ibin-Nm] W H D Ø B 0.40-10 0.5 161-18 1.20-5 2 x 0.3-7.59-15 625-70 high R R R R R – – – Terminal covers low fixed part R – R – R – R – R – R – R – R – Phase separators R R R R R R – – A = Tightening the terminal onto the circuit breaker B = Tightening of the cable/busbar onto the terminal R = On request S = Standard ABB 3/9 .31-8 2 x 0.59-15 625-70 3.79-20 0.27-7 80-9 1.33-8.37-9.47-12 0.20-5 4 x 0.5 54-6 0.43-11 0.31-8 0.5 0.94-24 0.38-35 0.33-8.P(2) F(2) F(2) F(2) F(2) F(2) (3) (4) F F-P F-P F-P-W F-P-W F-W F-W F-P F-P F-P-W F-P(5)-W(5) F F F-P F-P F F F F P-W P-W W F-W P-W P-W W F-W F F = Fixed P = Plug-in W = Draw-out F 3 UL listed Standard supply External and standard versions Orientated for Tmax and threaded for Isomax Only for T5 600 Front terminals .2-5 0.5 71-8 0.5 250-28 1.37-9.P(2) F .31-8 0.79-20 0.43-11 161-18 3.94-100 – 0.97-50 0.26-6.5 0.41-10.5 0.94-100 – 0.97-50 0.20-5 4 x 0.

EF T1-T5 1SDC210231F0023 S6 800 1SDC210230F0023 S7 1SDC210230F0023 PF S6 1SDC210230F0023 PF S7 1SDC210230F0023 Allow connection of busbars or cables terminated with cable terminals Type T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 S6 S7 Version F F-P F-P F P-W F P-W F-W F-W Pieces 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Busbars [in-mm] Cable terminals [in-mm] Tightening [Ibin-Nm] W D Ø L Ø A B(1) 0.5 0.41-10.16-4 0.5 1.59-15 3 x 0.41-10.39-10 0.18-30 0.39-10 – 161-18 1.20-5 0.59-15 0.55-14 1.43-11 252-28 161-18 3.97-50 4 x 0.5 63-7 80-9 0.18-30 0.18-30 0.41-10.51-13 402-45 179-30 Terminal covers high low fixed part – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Phase separators S S S S – – Only for T5 600 A = Tightening the terminal onto the circuit breaker B = Tightening of the cable/busbar onto the terminal R = On request S = Standard 3/10 ABB .24-6 0.5 0.31-8 – 80-9 1.39-10 71-8 161-18 0.Accessories Connection terminals Front extended terminals .43-11 402-45 161-18 Terminal covers high low fixed part R – – R – – R – – R – – – – R R – – – – – R R – – R – Phase separators S S S S R S S R R 3 Front extended spread terminals .43-11 252-28 161-18 1.79-20 0.16-4 0.77-45 0.41-10.ES T1-T5 1SDC210232F0023 S6 1SDC210230F0023 S7 1SDC210230F0023 Allow connection of busbars or cables terminated with cable terminals Type T2 T3 T4 T5 S6 S7 (1) Version F-P F-P F-P-W F-P(1)-W(1) F F Pieces 1 1 1 1 1 1 Busbars [in-mm] Cable terminals [in-mm] Tightening [Ibin-Nm] W D Ø L Ø A B 1.39-10 0.97-50 0.79-20 0.77-45 0.5 1.54-90 0.18-30 0.18-30 0.79-20 0.79-20 0.16-4 0.43-11 0.59-15 0.31-8 4 x 0.5 161-18 161-18 1.33-8.18-30 0.41-10.39-10 0.51-13 80-9 268-30 3.5 54-6 80-9 0.5 71-8 161-18 1.51-13 4x1.97-50 0.33-8.31-8 3 x 0.79-20 0.79-20 0.5 1.43-11 0.39-10 0.54-90 0.59-15 0.41-10.79-20 0.43-11 1.97-50 0.55-14 80-9 268-30 1.39-10 161-18 161-18 0.18-30 0.43-11 1.31-8 0.39-10 1.18-30 0.20-5 0.5 54-6 161-18 1.33-8.57-40 0.79-20 0.39-10 0.18-30 0.24-6 0.27-7 0.18-30 0.51-13 4x1.33-8.

FC Cu(1) Allow connection of bare copper cables directly to the circuit breaker Type Version Pieces 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 Cable [AWG or Kcmil-mm2] rigid flexible 14…2/0-2.75-9 0.71-18 0.5…50 18…3/0-1…95 18…2/0-1…70 – 18…0-1…50 10…350-6…185 10…300-6…150 – 10…2/0-6…70 14…350-2.55-14 0.6 200-22.5…185 14…300-2.85-21.5 Ø [in-mm] Terminal covers high R low R fixed part R Phase separators T1 1P/T1 standard T2 T3 T4 T5 400 T5 S6 S7 standard standard standard standard standard external external standard standard standard standard F-P F-P F-P F-P-W F F F F-P-W F F F 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 4 50-5.5…70 14…1-2.5…6 8.39-9.67-17 0.55-14 0.39-10 0.5 45-5 80-9 80-9 80-9 274-31 50-5.5 Terminal covers high low fixed part R R – R R – R R R R R R R R R R R R R R S R R S R R S R R S S – – Phase separators R R R R R R R R R R – T1/T1P F F T2 F-P F-P T3 F-P F-P T4 F-P-W F-P-W T5 F-P-W F-P-W F (1) UL listed for Tmax T1 1SDC210233F0023 Front terminals for copper/aluminium cables .47-12 0.6 274-31 274-31 380-43 80-9 44-5 311-35 B 0.5…50 14…1/0-2.5…50 3/0…250-95…120 3/0…500-95…240 250…500-120…240 2/0…400-70…185 250…500-120…240 4/0…500-95…240 Tightening [Ibin-Nm] A 20-2.61-15.5 R R R R R S S R S S S R R R R R R R R S R S R R R R R R R R A = Tightening the terminal onto the circuit breaker B = Tightening of the cable/busbar onto the terminal R = On request S = Standard ABB 3/11 .5…50 – 14…1-2.5 40-4.7-18 0.5…95 6…500-16…240 6…500-16…300 – 6…300-16…150 – 1…350-50…185 Tightening [Ibin-Nm] A B – 62-7 – 62-7 – 62-7 – 62-7 – 89-10 – 89-10 – 89-10 – 89-10 – 222-25 – 222-25 161-18 279-31 Ø [in-mm] 0.5…150 – 14…3/0-2.37-9.FC CuAl (UL listed) T2-T5 Standard 1SDC210234F0023 T4-T5 External 1SDC210235F0023 S6 800 1SDC210236F0023 S7 1SDC210236F0023 3 Allow connection of bare copper or aluminium cables directly to the circuit breaker (solid aluminium cables cannot be used) Type Assembly Version F Pieces 1 Cable [AWG or Kcmil-mm2] rigid 14…10-2.0-10 6…1/0-16…50 14…1/0-2.87-22 0.5 0.84-21.Front terminals for copper cables .6 80-9 80-9 159-18 159-18 159-18 383-43 276-31 383-43 0.1-28 0.5 0.84-21.6 50-5.1-28 1.9 0.5 0.85-21.47-12 0.71-18 0.5…50 4…300-25…150 6…350-6…185 14…1/0-2.71-18 1.71-18 0.

98-25 Cable terminals [in-mm] Tightening [Ibin-Nm] L Ø A B 1.27-7 0.33-8.5 0.5 0.79-20 0.689-17.5 1.R Terminal covers high low fixed part – S – Phase separators – Allow connection of copper or aluminium cables directly to the circuit breaker Type Version Pieces Cable terminals [AWG or Kcmil-mm2] 2/0…300-70…150 Tightening [Ibin-Nm] A 80-9 B 276-31 Ø [in-mm] Terminal covers high S low – fixed part – Phase separators S6 F 3 0.79-20 0.97-50 0.98-25 161-18 890-100 1SDC210236F0023 Threaded rear terminals for Isomax .39-10 0.24-6 0.R 1SDC210237F0023 Rear orientated terminals for Tmax .RC S6 800 – A = Tightening the terminal onto the circuit breaker B = Tightening of the cable/busbar onto the terminal R = On request S = Standard 3/12 ABB .43-11 Tightening [Ibin-Nm] A B 54-6 80-9 54-6 80-9 54-6 80-9 161-18 161-18 Terminal covers high low – S – S – S – S Phase separators – – – – – S6 Allow connection of busbars at the rear 3 Type S6 Version Pieces F 2 Busbars [in-mm] W D Ø 1.20-5 0.16-4 0.Accessories Connection terminals Allow connection of busbars or cable terminal at the rear Type T2 T3 T4 T5 Version F-P F-P F F Pieces 1 1 1 2 Busbars [in-mm] W D Ø 0.79-20 0.33-8.5 1SDC210236F0023 Rear terminals for copper/aluminium cables for Isomax .97-50 0.33-8.18-30 0.

20-5 4 x 0.20-5 0.39-10 0.97-50 0.43-11 – – 3.47-12 0.39-10 0.2 0.94-100 0.2 0.55-14 0.57-40 0.55-14 1.5…35 Tightening [Ibin-Nm] A B 161-18 62-7 Terminal covers high low fixed part S – – Phase separators – A = Tightening the terminal onto the circuit breaker B = Tightening of the cable/busbar onto the terminal R = On request S = Standard ABB 1SDC210240F0023 Multi-cable terminals for Tmax .55-14 0.43-11 1.24-6.24-6.5…25 14…4-2.39-10 0. Type T1 T4 T5 400 T5 600 S6 S7 S8 2000 S8 2500 Version Pieces F P-W P-W P-W W F-W F F 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 Busbars [in-mm] Cable terminal [in-mm] W D Ø L Ø 0.39-10 0.98-25 0.20-5 0.57-40 0.59-15 0.1SDC210238F0023 1SDC210239F0023 Allow connection of busbars at the rear.59-15 – – 3.94-100 0.97-50 0.47-12 1.55-14 1. 1SDC210236F0023 1SDC210236F0023 1SDC210236F0023 Rear flat horizontal and vertical terminals .MC 3 3/13 .79-20 0.97-50 0.79-20 0.43-11 1.59-15 – – Tightening [Ibin-Nm] A B 63-7 45-5 161-18 – 161-18 – 161-18 – – 267-30 – 179-20 – 625-70 – 625-70 Terminal covers high low fixed part – S – – – – – – – – – – – – – – S – – – – – – – Phase separators – – – – – – – – Note: for T1 and S8 only the terminals are available.31-8 4 x 0.98-25 0.HR/VR S7 S6 S7 Allow connection of cables directly to the circuit breaker Type T4 Version F Pieces max 6 Cable [AWG or Kcmil-mm2] flexible rigid 14…4-2.20-5 4 x 0.

For Isomax S6 and S7.Shunt trip (UL file: E116596) This allows circuit breaker opening by means of an electrical command. with a much lower power consumption and these can be continuously supplied: in this case they are not. They are supplied in the pre-cabled version with 39. either the pre-cabled or uncabled version can be selected.4” (1 m) long cables for Tmax T1. T1-T2-T3 T4-T5 1SDC210241F0023 3 S6-S7 1SDC210242F0023 S8 1SDC210243F0023 1SDC210245F0023 3/14 1SDC210244F0023 ABB . Again for these coils. SOR . in fact. are always alternative to each other. It is always fitted with an auxiliary limit contact. housed and fixed in a slot on the left-hand side of the circuit breaker. for T4 and T5.Accessories Service releases The shunt trip and undervoltage releases. Operation of the release is guaranteed for a voltage between 75% and 110% of the value of the rated power supply voltage Un. Furthermore. still with 39. or socket-plug connectors.4” (1 m) long cables. T2 and T3 circuit breakers. both in AC and DC. Assembly is carried out by pressure into the appropriate seat located in the left-hand part of the circuit breaker and fixing with the screw provided. PS-SOR opening coils with permanent operation are also available for T4 and T5. fitted with an auxiliary limit contact. the power supply is made by means of special connectors.

T2. S7 Version 12 V DC 24 V AC/DC 30 V DC 48 V AC/DC 60 V DC 100…127 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC-110…125 V DC 127…150 V AC 160 V DC-150…180 V AC 200…250 V AC/DC 220…240 V AC-220…250 V DC 480 V AC 380…500 V AC Opening times [ms] AC [VA] – 150 – 150 – – 150 – – – 150 150 – 15 DC [W] 150 150 – 150 – – 150 – – – 150 – – – – – – 200 – 200 – 200 200 200 – – 200 – Isomax S8 AC [VA] DC [W] – 150 150 150 150 150 – – 150 150 – – – – 3 PS-SOR .Electrical characteristics Absorbed power on inrush Tmax T4 and T5 Version 24-30 V DC 110…120 V AC 24 V AC/DC AC [VA] – 4 – DC [W] 4 – – – – 3.2 ABB 3/15 . T3 Version 12 V DC 24…30 V AC/DC 48…60 V AC/DC 110…127 V AC-110…125 V DC 220…240 V AC-220…250 V DC 380…440 V AC 480…500 V AC Opening times [ms] AC [VA] – 50 60 50 50 55 55 15 DC [W] 50 50 60 50 50 – – 15 Tmax T4 and T5 AC [VA] – 150 150 150 150 150 150 15 DC [W] 150 150 150 150 150 – – 15 Absorbed power on inrush Isomax S6.Electrical characteristics Absorbed power on inrush Tmax T1.SOR .9 Isomax S6 and S7 AC [VA] DC [W] – – 4.

69 to 0.35 x Un. the circuit breaker can be closed again starting from a voltage higher than 0.85 x Un. After tripping.Accessories Service releases UVR . With the undervoltage release de-energized.7 x Un with a trip range from 0.Undervoltage release 1SDC210246F0023 (UL file: E116596) This opens the circuit breaker due to a power supply failure of the release or to voltage drops to values of less than 0. it is not possible to close the circuit breaker. T1-T2-T3 T4-T5 S6-S7 1SDC210247F0023 S8 1SDC210243F0023 1SDC210248F0023 3 3/16 1SDC210244F0023 ABB .

UVR .5 1 1 2 2. T2.5 3 4 15 DC [W] 1. S7 Version 24 V DC 24 V AC 30 V DC 30 V AC 48 V AC 48 V DC 60 V DC 60 V AC 100 V AC 110…115 V AC 110…115 V AC 110…127 V AC 125…127 V AC 110…125 V DC 120 V AC 127…130 V AC 125 V DC 240 V AC 250 V DC 480 V AC 208…220 V AC 220 V AC 220…250 V DC 230…240 V AC 277 V AC 380 V AC 380…400 V AC 440 V AC 480 V AC 500 V AC Opening times [ms] AC [VA] – 10 – – 10 – – – – – – 10 – – – – – 10 – 10 – – – – – – – – – – 25 DC [W] 4 – – – – 4 – – – – – – – – – – 4 – 4 – – – – – – – – – – – 25 – 30 (50 Hz) – 30 (50 Hz) 30 (50 Hz) – – 30 (50 Hz) 30 (50 Hz) 30 (60 Hz) 30 (50 Hz) 30 (50 Hz) 30 (60 Hz) – 30 (60 Hz) 30 (50 Hz) – 30 (60 Hz) – – 30 (60 Hz) 30 (50 Hz) – 30 (50 Hz) 30 (60 Hz) 30 (60 Hz) 30 (50 Hz) 30 (60 Hz) 30 (60 Hz) 30 (50 Hz) 25 Isomax S8 AC [VA] DC [W] 15 – 15 – – 15 15 – – – – – – 15 – – – – – – – – 15 – – – – – – – 25 3 ABB 3/17 .5 1 1 2 2.5 – – 15 Tmax T4 and T5 AC [VA] 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 25 DC [W] 3 3 3 3 3 – – 25 Power consumption during permanent operation Isomax S6.Electrical characteristics Power consumption during permanent operation Tmax T1. T3 Version 24…30 V AC/DC 48 V AC/DC 60 V AC/DC 110…127 V AC-110…125 V DC 220…240 V AC-220…250 V DC 380…440 V AC 480…500 V AC Opening times [ms] AC [VA] 1.

this allows circuit breaker closing by means of an electrical contact.Accessories Service releases Closing coil Used with Isomax S8 circuit breaker. 1SDC210249F0023 3 Closing coil Isomax S8 Absorbed power on inrush Version 24 V DC 24 V AC (60Hz) 48 V DC 110…125 V DC 120 V AC (60Hz) 208…220 V AC (60Hz) 220…250 V DC 240 V AC (60Hz) 415…440 V AC-480 V AC (60Hz) Opening times [ms] 200 200 25 25 200 200 220 200 220 220 AC [VA] DC [W] 220 3/18 1SDC210250F0023 ABB . both in AC and in DC. Operation of the release is guaranteed for a voltage between 80% and 110% of the value of the rated power supply voltage Un.

8’ (2 meters) are available for Tmax: the socket-plugs are necessary only for plug-in version. 1SDC210251F0023 Extension for testing releases Available for Tmax T4 and T5 and Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers. Assembly is by means of pressure into special slots in the left side of the circuit breaker.e.Time delay device for undervoltage release The undervoltage release can be combined with an external electronic power supply time delay device. according to preset and adjustable delays. They are available in the following versions: – for Isomax S6 and S7 fixed circuit breakers – for Isomax S6 and S7 draw out circuit breakers. 6 or 12 poles and cable kit (UL/CSA) with a length of 78. i. Cables of different lengths (UL/CSA) are available. which allows circuit breaker opening to be delayed in the case of a drop or failure in the power supply voltage of the release itself. This time delay device can also be combined either with the Tmax T1…T5 or Isomax circuit breakers. 3 1SDC210252F0023 Connectors for service releases for Isomax These allow the shunt trip or undervoltage release to be connected to the power supply circuit. in order to prevent unwarranted trips caused by temporary malfunctions. Socket-plugs with 3. 1SDC210253F0023 1SDC210254F0023 ABB 1SDC210255F0023 3/19 . this allows supply to the service releases with the circuit breaker in the racked out position. It is therefore possible to carry out blank operating tests of the circuit breaker in safe conditions. The delay device must be combined with an undervoltage release with the same corresponding voltage. isolated in relation to the power circuits.UVD .

3 0. Installation of these accessories takes place directly from the front of the circuit breaker. T5. which signals the circuit breaker open due to one of the following reasons: AUX . 3/20 1SDC210256F0023 ABB .Auxiliary contacts and bell alarm (UL file: E116596) These carry out electrical signalling of the operating state of the circuit breaker: – open/closed.4” (1 m) long cables. T5 Power supply voltage [V] 125 250 400 – 12 3 AUX 24 V . T3.3 0.15 – DC 0. still with 1m long cables. T4 and T5 Power supply voltage [V] 24 5 Service current [A] AC 0. S6 and S7.4” (1 m) long cables for the T1.5 0. For Isomax S6 and S7. Auxiliary contacts can be supplied (according to the type) in the pre-cabled version with 1 m long cables for T1. still with 39. T2.S6. with increased operator safety. S7 Power supply voltage [V] 125 250 400 – 6 3 AUX 500 V . T2 and T3 circuit breakers. T2. T3. the power supply is made by means of special connectors. for T4 and T5. for T4. or socket-plug connectors.Electrical characteristics AUX 250 V .S8 Power supply voltage [V] 220 380 500 – 6 3 Service current [A] AC DC 1 – – Service current [A] AC DC 0.T1. in special slots on the right-hand side of the circuit breaker.T1. completely segregated from the live parts. T4 and T5 Power supply voltage [V] 125 250 6 5 AUX 400V . which indicates the position of the main contacts – bell alarm. They are supplied in the pre-cabled version with 39. T2 and T3 or with connectors. AUX .T4.3 – AUX 400V .3 – Service current [A] AC DC 0.15 – – – – – 3 overload or short circuit shunt trip UVR residual current release emergency opening pushbutton of the motor operator – operation of the circuit breakers test pushbutton.Accessories Electrical signals These allow information relative to the circuit breaker status to be taken outside the circuit breaker.75 mA 1 mA Service current [A] AC DC 0.

Signals AUX 250 V AC/DC AUX 250 V AC/DC AUX 250 V AC/DC AUX 250 V AC/DC AUX 400 V AC 1 open/closed changeover contact + 1 bell alarm contact 3 open/closed changeover contacts + 1 bell alarm contact 1 contact signalling coil tripped + 1 open/closed changeover contact + 1 bell alarm contact 2 open/closed changeover contacts + 1 bell alarm contact 1 open/closed changeover contact + 1 bell alarm contact T1 T2 TMF T2 PR221DS T3 T4 T5 S6 S7 S8 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 3 AUX 400 V AC 2 open/closed changeover contacts AUX 400 V AC/250 V DC 1 contact signalling coil tripped + 1 open/closed changeover contact + 1 bell alarm contact AUX 24 V AC/DC AUX-SA 3 open/closed changeover contacts + 1 bell alarm contact 1 contact signalling coil tripped AUX-MO 1 contact signalling manual/remote AUX 500 V AC/220 V DC 3 open/closed changeover contacts AUX 500 V AC/220 V DC 1 bell alarm contact ABB 3/21 . PR222DS/P and PR222DS/PD-A (AUX-SA) – 250 V AC Only in the pre-cabled version: – 1 contact for bell alarm. T2. T4 and T5 with PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip unit (AUX-E) Only in the uncabled version and only combined with the PR222DS/PD-A. T4 and T5 (AUX) – 400 V AC (UL file: E116596) Only in the pre-cabled version: – 1 contact for signalling (on changeover) open/closed plus 1 contact (on changeover) for bell alarm – 2 contacts for signalling (on changeover) open/closed.250 V AC/DC In the pre-cabled version: – a contact for signalling alarm which signals intervention of one of the protection functions of electronic trip unit plus a contact for signalling (on changeover) open/closed plus a contact for signalling (on changeover) release tripped – two open/closed signalling contacts (on changeover) plus one release tripped signalling contact (on changeover). T4 and T5 (AUX-MO) Only in the uncabled version. T3. S8 (AUX) – 500 V AC/220 V DC (UL file: E116596) In the pre-cabled version: – 3 contacts during open/closed changeover – 1 bell alarm. T2. T4 and T5 with PR221DS. T2 and T3: – 3 contacts for signalling (on changeover) open/closed plus 1 contact (on changeover) for bell alarm. T4 and T5 (AUX) – 250 V AC/DC (UL file: E116596) In the pre-cabled version: – 1 contact for signalling (on changeover) open/closed plus 1 contact (on changeover) for bell alarm – 3 contacts for signalling (on changeover) open/closed plus 1 contact (on changeover) for bell alarm. to be combined with the MOE or MOE-E motor operator: – 1 contact for signalling the operating mode of the circuit breaker with the motor operator: manual or remote. S6 and S7 (AUX) – 400 V AC/250 V DC (UL file: E116596) In the pre-cabled and uncabled version: – 1 contact during open/closed changeover + 1 bell alarm – 2 contacts for signalling (on changeover) open/closed – 1 open signal +1 closed signal +1 bell alarm. T1. they communicate the state of the circuit breaker to the electronic trip unit. T3.The auxiliary contacts are available for use with different voltages either in direct or alternating current: T1. T4 and T5 (AUX) – 24 V DC Gold-plated in the pre-cabled and uncabled version for T4 and T5 and only in the uncabled version for T1. – 1 contact for signalling (on changeover) open/closed + 1 contact (on changeover) for bell alarm. T2 with PR221DS electronic trip unit .

T1-T2-T3 T4 S6-S7 1SDC210257F0023 AUX-C 250 V AC/DC 3 3/22 1SDC210258F0023 1SDC210259F0023 ABB .Accessories Electrical signals A change-over contact signalling residual current protection trip is always supplied for the Tmax circuit breakers combined with the RC221 and RC222 residual current releases (in accordance with IEC 60947-2 Standard). Two change-over contacts for signalling pre-alarm and alarm are also available with RC222.

blank tests of circuit breaker operation can be carried out. 1SDC210260F0023 3 1SDC210261F0023 1SDC210262F0023 Extension for testing auxiliary contacts Available for Tmax T4 and T5. 6 or 12 poles and cable kit (UL/CSA) with a length of 78. isolated in relation to the power circuits. and Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers. For Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers.8” (2 m) are available. the auxiliary contacts (fitted with plug connector) can only be supplied by means of the specific connectors to be ordered specifying the size and version of the circuit breaker (fixed or plug-in/draw out). this allows the auxiliary contacts to be connected to the relative power supply circuit with the circuit breaker in the withdrawn position. With the circuit breaker in safe conditions. Assembly is carried out by mounting into special slots on the right side of the circuit breaker. Socket-plugs with 3.Connectors for auxiliary contacts for Isomax These allow the auxiliary contacts to be connected to the relative power supply circuit. i.e. For Tmax: the socket-plugs are necessary only for plug-in version. ABB 1SDC210263F0023 3/23 .

in compliance with the IEC 60204-1. They are mounted inside the direct rotary handle operating mechanism.Early auxiliary contacts One auxiliary contact for Isomax S6 and S7 and two contacts for Tmax T1.Accessories Electrical signals AUE . complete with socket-plug with 6 poles. With Tmax T1. 1SDC210264F0023 T1-T5 3 1SDC210265F0023 S6…S7 1SDC210266F0023 3/24 1SDC210267F0023 ABB . T2 and T3. in relation to closing of the main contacts. the early contacts are supplied in the cabled version with cables 39. T4 and T5 allow the undervoltage release or a control device to be supplied in advance.4” (1 m) long. whereas for T4 and T5 early contacts are provided with socket-plug connectors with 39. T3. For Isomax S6 and S7. the contact is supplied complete with a socket connector with double slide for simultaneous connection of the undervoltage release and of the consent contact itself.4” (1 m) cables. T2. and VDE 0113 Standards.

can be installed on the fixed part. and Isomax S6 and S7 they provide electrical signalling of the circuit breaker position in relation to the fixed part: racked-in.AUP .Auxiliary position contacts For the fixed part of circuit breakers Tmax T2. They can only be connected by means of free wires and are available in the following versions: – contacts signalling circuit breaker racked-in for Tmax and Isomax circuit breakers – contacts signalling circuit breaker racked-out for Tmax T4 and T5 for the draw-out version – contacts signalling circuit breaker racked-in for Tmax T4 and T5 in 24 V DC – contacts signalling circuit breaker racked-out for Tmax T4 and T5 in 24 V DC for the draw-out version. A maximum of three contacts for Tmax and a maximum of five contacts for S6 and S7. also suitable for use for Un<24 V voltages with the same type of signaling and versions (for Isomax). in any combination. T4 and T5. drawn out and removed. The circuit breaker position contacts are also available in the goldplated version for digital signals. T3. 1SDC210268F0023 1SDC210269F0023 3 T2-T3 T4-T5 S6-S7 1SDC210270F0023 ABB 1SDC210271F0023 3/25 1SDC210272F0023 .

Solenoid operating mechanism for Tmax T1.1 < 0.. Coupling with the residual current release is only allowed for a circuit breaker with solenoid operator side-by-side. MOS . Operations] [no. T2 and T3 (UL file: E116596) This operates both opening and closing of the circuit breaker. acting directly on its lever. for installation on a panel or DIN rail. using the solenoid operator superimposed would imply the circuit breaker position on the rear of the door and its residual current release and the interface would no longer be accessible.4” (1 m) long and socketplug connector with 3 poles just for the superimposed version. Both versions can be used either in the three-pole or fourpole version.. They are always fitted with a padlock in the open position. A selector allows changeover from automatic to manual operation. Operations/h] [V] [V] 110…250 48…60 / 110…250 85…110% Un 1800 [VA] / 1000 [W] < 0. 120 (T3) IP30 [ms] >100 Degree of protection. on the front Minimum control impulse time on opening and closing Note: with the MOS in the 110.250 V AC/DC version. The latter is complete with operating handle. The solenoid operator is supplied complete with free cables 39. T2 and T3. It is proposed in two versions. with T1 and T2. the other on the front of the circuit breaker (UL file: E116596). it is necessary to use the MOS-A adapter (supplied) for 220 V Un 250 V service voltage 3/26 1SDC210274F0023 ABB . with T1. Un AC DC Operating voltage Inrush power consumption Time Mechanical life opening [s] closing [s] [no. In fact. The front version can also be used with plug-in circuit breakers. This combination can only be installed directly on the back plate of the switchboard. The table gives the power supply voltage values Un [V]. to allow access to the user interface of the residual current release from the front of the switchgear. one “side-by-side” (IEC only).Accessories Remote controls These allow remote control of circuit breaker opening and closing and are particularly suitable for use in electrical network supervision and control systems.1 25000 240 (T1 and T2). 3 1SDC210273F0023 Rated voltage.

resetting [s] 3 The device can be fitted both Mechanical life [no. which provides a signal of its service state: “auto” (remote control of the circuit breaker) or “manual”. in the latter case. the spring system is recharged automatically: the stored energy is exploited in this MOE Tmax T4 and T5 way to close the circuit breaker. On request. it can also be fitted with an AUX-MO auxiliary contact (on changeover).Stored energy motor operator for Tmax T4 and T5 – MOE (MOE: UL file: E116596) With the stored energy motor operator. 380 – once inserted in the special slot Operating voltage 85…110% Un 85…110% Un Power consumption on inrush Ps 300 V A 300 W on the right-hand side of the cirPower consumption in service Pc 150 V A 150 W cuit breaker. 1SDC210275F0023 3 ABB 1SDC210276F0023 3/27 .e. only of mechanical type. it is possible to control both opening and closing of the circuit breaker on which it is installed. Rated voltage.1 breaker itself. Un AC [V] DC [V] The motor operator is always – 24 supplied complete with socket– 48…60 plug connectors with 39.4’’ (1m) 110…125 110…125 long cables and is always fitted 220…250 220…250 with a padlock. the lock in the open position is both of electrical and mechanical type. The connectors. i. only closing from the front of the circuit breaker (remote closing is allowed).5 to the outline of the circuit closing [s] < 0. operations] 20000 with a key lock in the open poDegree of protection. During opening of the circuit breaker. extend in relation Time opening [s] 1. The motor operator is always fitted with an auxiliary contact to signal “auto” or “manual (not on changeover). on the front IP30 sition (with the same MOL-S Minimum opening and closing control time [ms] 150 keys for groups of circuit breakers or different MOL-D keys) and with a MOL-M key lock against manual operation: in the former case.

which will then be connected to the socket located on the cradle for the moving parts of the plug-in or draw out version of Tmax T4 and T5. Depending on the electrical accessories required. it is necessary to use the adapters to be coupled with the plug. it will be necessary to ask for one or two adapters to be mounted on the left side and/or on the right side of the moving part There are four types of adapters available: – 5-way adapters – 6-way adapters – 10-way adapters – 12-way adapters. The table below indicates the adapters which must be used for the various possible configurations of electrical accessories: ADP adapters for T4 and T5 cabled accessories 5-way 6-way 10-way 12-way 3 left side SOR UVR SA for residual current RC222 SOR o UVR + SA for residual current RC222 MOE MOE + SOR or UVR MOE + SOR or UVR + SA for residual current RC222 AUE AUE + SOR or UVR AUE + SOR or UVR + SA for residual current RC222 right side AUX 1Q + 1SY 1 open/closed changeover contact + 1 release tripped changeover contact AUX 2Q 2 open/closed changeover contacts AUX 3Q + 1SY 3 open/closed changeover contacts + 1 release tripped changeover contact ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 3/28 ABB .ADP For the pre-cabled electrical accessories.Accessories Remote controls Adapters .

The table shows the power supply voltages values Un [V].2 0. the key lock against manual operation is necessary. operations] Degree of protection. Un [V] [V] [V] [V] Operating frequency Operating voltage Power consumption on inrush Ps Power consumption in service Pc Time constant Duration Mechanical life [ms] opening [s] closing [s] [no.Stored energy motor operator for Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers (UL file: E116596) With the stored energy operating mechanism.5000 (S7) IP30 100 85…110% Un 600 W 180 W DC 24 48 125 250 3 1SDC210278F0023 ABB 1SDC210279F0023 3/29 . on the front Minimum duration of the opening and closing command impulse [ms] 120 240 50…60 85…110% Un 660 VA 180 VA 22 1. In case of interlocked circuit breakers. S7 AC Rated voltage. It is supplied complete with shunt opening release (Ps=100VA/100W) and flange for the compartment door. during circuit breaker opening the release mechanism automatically pre-charges a system of springs: the stored energy is used for closing the circuit breaker. 1SDC210277F0023 Motor operator for S6.09 10000 (S6) .

It must be ordered specifying the size and version of the circuit breaker (fixed or plug-in/draw out) and automatically excludes the corresponding extension for testing the auxiliary contacts. They are an alternative to the corresponding connectors for the auxiliary contacts only since they are housed in the same seat. blank operating tests of the circuit breaker can be carried out.e. this allows both motor operators and the auxiliary contacts to be connected to the relative power supply circuit with the circuit breaker in the racked-out position.Accessories Remote controls Geared motor for Isomax S8 circuit breaker 1SDC210280F0023 This allows the springs of the circuit breaker closing mechanism to be charged automatically. Connectors for Isomax S6 and S7 motor operators The motor operators for S6 and S7 can only be supplied by means of the specific connectors. i. isolated in relation to the power circuits. It includes a limit microswitch for electrical signalling of closing springs charged. immediately following a closing operation. With the circuit breaker in safe conditions. 3/30 1SDC210283F0023 1SDC210282F0023 ABB . They are of the slide type and allow simultaneous connection of both the motor operator and the auxiliary contacts to the relative power supply circuit. 3 1SDC210281F0023 Extension for testing motor operators For Tmax T4 and T5 and Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers. They must be ordered specifying the size and version of the circuit breaker (fixed or plug-in/draw out).

T5 F/P W ■ – ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ F ■ ■ 19. Application of the rotary handle operating mechanism is an alternative to the motor operator and to the front interlocking plate for Tmax T1. The rotary handle operating mechanism in the emergency version. and 0. on request. is also available for all the circuit breakers. the rotary handle operating mechanisms can be ordered by building up by ordering the following three devices: – rotary handle on the compartment door – transmission rod (19. For Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers. it can be supplied with a compartment door lock or key lock in the open position.68" . suitable for machine tool control. T3 F/P RHD RHD_EM RHE RHE_EM RHE_S RHE_B RHE_H Direct Emergency direct Transmitted with adjustable distance Emergency transmitted with adjustable distance Rod for transmitted adjustable handle Base for circuit breaker Handle for transmitted RH with adjustable distance ■ ■ 19.500 mm – – – – S6. the direct rotary handle operating mechanism on the circuit breaker is always supplied complete with flange for the compartment door. for S6 and S7.500 mm 19. on request. T5 and Isomax S6 and S7.68" . which prevents the circuit breaker being closed.Accessories Operating mechanisms with locks Rotary handle operating mechanism – RHD/RHE (UL file: E116596 for Tmax) The rotary handle operating mechanism facilitates operation thanks to its ergonomic handle.500 mm – – – – – RHE_H_EM Emergency handle for transmitted RH with adjustable distance ABB 1SDC210286F0023 3 3/31 . T3 and to the front flange for the lever operating mechanism for Tmax T4.24” (6 mm) for S6 and S7 (not supplied).68" . T2.500 mm 19.27” (7 mm) for T1. T3 T4 and T5. 1SDC210284F0023 1SDC210285F0023 Type of RH operating mechanism T1. by using the code of the ready-configured version. The rotary handle operating mechanism for Tmax is always fitted with a compartment door lock and.68" . The padlock slot can take up to three padlocks – stem Ø 0. It is always fitted with a padlock in the open position.68" . alternatively. complete with red-yellow handle and yellow plate. The rotary handle operating mechanism is available in either the direct version and in the transmitted version on the compartment door. S7 W ■ ■ 19. can be supplied with a key lock in the open position. T2.68" .68” / 500 mm) – base for circuit breaker or. T2. The trip unit settings and the nameplate data remain accessible to the user. For Tmax circuit breakers.500 mm ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ T4.500 mm 19.

Accessories Operating mechanisms with locks T2-T3 T4-T5 1SDC210287F0023 3 1SDC210289F0023 S6-S7 IP54 protection for rotary handle (UL file: E116596 for Tmax T4-T5) 1SDC210292F0023 Allows IP54 degree of protection to be obtained. It is available for the transmitted rotary handle operating mechanism on the compartment door (RHE) for the Tmax and Isomax circuit breakers. 3/32 1SDC210290F0023 ABB 1SDC210291F0023 1SDC210288F0023 .

The following versions are available: – lock with different key for each circuit breaker – lock with the same key for groups of circuit breakers. It is available in the following versions: – for fixed or plug-in circuit breaker – for draw out circuit breaker.Front flange for lever operating mechanism – FLD (UL file: E116596 for Tmax) This can be installed on Tmax T4 and T5. plug-in or draw out circuit breakers. It is always fitted with a padlock in the open position (stem Ø 0. different locks are supplied.24” . and on Isomax S6 and S7 fixed. the key lock is available for the rotary handle operating mechanism (RHL).6 mm up to three padlocks . In case of draw out circuit breakers installed in compartments. up to four different key numbering codes are available. Furthermore. it can be fitted with a key lock in the open position for one or more circuit breakers and with the compartment door lock. The front flange for lever operating mechanism is always an alternative to the motor operator. For T4 and T5 key locks in the open position are available either with different keys (KLF-D) or with the same keys (KLF-S): in this case. it is also available in the version which allows the lock both in the open and in the closed position: the lock in the closed position does not prevent tripping of the mechanism following a fault or a remote control command. For Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers. For Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers. to the rotary handle and. for stored energy motor operator. 1SDC210294F0023 1SDC210293F0023 S6-S7 1SDC210295F0023 3 Key lock in open position This allows the mechanical closing operation of the circuit breaker to be locked. for T4 and T5. For Tmax T1. it allows higher degree of protection to be maintained for the whole isolation run of the circuit breaker. to the front display unit FDU.not supplied) which prevents closing of the circuit breaker. it is always supplied complete with flange for the compartment door. for rotary handle or front for lever operating mechanism. T2 and T3. On request. 1SDC210296F0023 ABB 1SDC210298F0023 1SDC210297F0023 3/33 .

the door lock is always supplied with the rotary handle operating mechanism. a motor operator. with key removable in both positions (KLC-S). It cannot be mounted with a front operating mechanism. a rotary handle operating mechanism. It consists of two elements: one applied to the rotary handle operating mechanism or to the front for the lever operating mechanism. For Tmax circuit breakers. T2 and T3. It can be used with Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers in the fixed. 1SDC210299F0023 3 1SDC210300F0023 Compartment door lock This prevents the compartment door being opened with the circuit breaker closed. The key lock is the Ronis 622 type and is available in two versions: – standard type. plug-in or draw out version and fitted with rotary handle operating mechanism or front for lever operating mechanism. with key only removable with the circuit breaker locked (KLC) – special type. 3/34 1SDC210301F0023 ABB .Accessories Operating mechanisms with locks KLC . the key lock on the circuit breaker allows the mechanical closing operation of the circuit breaker to be locked and is installed directly on the front inside the slot in correspondence with the left pole. with service releases (UVR. consisting of a metal striker. the other. to be applied onto the compartment door. only in the case of three-pole circuit breakers.Key lock on the circuit breaker Available for Tmax T1. or RC221/RC222 residual current releases and. SOR).

to prevent racking-in of the withdrawable part. S7 Key locks or padlocks are available to be applied to the guide of the fixed part of a draw out circuit breaker to prevent the moving part from being racked-in. Selection can be made among the following: – key lock with different keys (KLF-D FP) – key lock with the same keys for groups of circuit breakers (KLF-S FP) – padlock.6 mm (not supplied). which can take up to three padlocks with stem Ø 0. which can take up to three padlocks with 6 mm stem Ø.Lock for fixed part of draw out circuit breakers .Tmax T4. – key lock in the open position between two or more circuit breakers with the same key for groups of circuit breakers.24” . 1SDC210302F0023 3 1SDC210303F0023 1SDC210304F0023 ABB 1SDC210305F0023 3/35 . – key lock in the open position with different key for each circuit breaker. – key lock of Ronis type (without key). not supplied (PLL FP). T5 and Isomax S6. The following different versions are available: – padlock. For T4 and T5 draw out circuit brakers. key or padlocks-locks are available to be applied onto the rail of the fixed part.

T2 and T3 covers to prevent the lever closing or opening operations. T3 This is applied to the Tmax T1.24” . It is available in the following versions: – locking device only of the closing operation (it is applied with circuit breaker ON/OFF) – locking device on the closing and opening operation according to its assembly position.7 mm (not supplied). 1SDC210307F0023 * * UL file E116596 3 1SDC210308F0023 Operating mechanisms with locks T1 Sealable lock of thermal adjustment FDL_Key lock for fornt for lever operating mechanism RHL_Key lock for rotary handle operating mechanism KLC_Key lock on the circuit breaker Compartment door lock KLF-FP and PLL-FP_locks in open position for fixed parts PLL_Padlock for operating lever MOL-D and MOL-S_Key lock in open position for MOE MOL-M_Key lock against manual operation for MOE ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ T2 ■ T3 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ T4 T5 S6 S7 3/36 1SDC210306F0023 ABB . It allows installation of up to a maximum of three padlocks Ø 0. T2. The lock on the opening operation does not prevent release of the mechanism following a fault or remote control command.Accessories Operating mechanisms with locks PLL .Padlock for operating lever for Tmax T1.

T3 For Tmax T1. even of different sizes. makes them mechanically interdependent. by means of a walking beam mechanism. T2 and T3 circuit breakers a front mechanical interlock (MIF) is available. S7 For Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers. by using a special plate. The front interlocking plate allows installation of a padlock in order to fix the position (possibility of fixing the O-O position as well). T2.emergency). It consists of a kit with levers and assembly accessories and a metallic support. It is also possible to interlock three circuit breakers.: normal . and of two plates (MIR-P) on which the circuit breakers are housed.Mechanical interlock between circuit breakers (for Tmax UL file E116596) Tmax T1. which can be applied on the front of two (UL file E116596) both three-pole and four-pole fixed version circuit breakers. Unlike the interlock used with T1. this is a rear interlock consisting of a vertical or horizontal frame group (MIR-HB or MIR-VB). The mechanical interlock is available in the version for side-by-side circuit breakers and for superimposed circuit breakers. T1-T2-T3 S6-S7 Mechanical interlocks Front interlock between two fixed circuit breakers Front interlock among three fixed circuit breakers Rear interlock between two fixed or plug-in or draw out circuit breakers side by side Rear interlock between two fixed or plug-in or draw out circuit breakers superimposed T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 S6 S7 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 1SDC210312F0023 1SDC210313F0023 1SDC210311F0023 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ABB 3/37 . makes them mechanically inter-dependent. by means of special lever mechanism. preventing simultaneous closing of the two circuit breakers. Types of back plates: 1SDC210310F0023 1SDC210309F0023 Interlock Type A B C D E F T4 (F-P-W) T4 (F-P-W) T4 (F-P-W) T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 630 (F) T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 630 (F) T5 630 (P-W) + + + + + + T4 (F-P-W) T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 630 (F) T5 630 (P-W) T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 630 (F) T5 630 (P-W) T5 630 (P-W) 3 Isomax S6. making the following interlocking combinations: IOO-OIO-OOI-OOO. It prevents operation in parallel of two power supply sources (e. For Tmax T3 is now available also rear interlock both vertical and horizontal. the rear mechanical interlock allows installation of two circuit breakers on a single support and. T2 and T3 which is frontal. Only circuit breakers of the same size and in the same version can be interlocked. Fixing is carried out directly on the back plate of the switchboard. Tmax T4. T5 S6-S7 The mechanical interlock for Tmax T4 and T5 allows installation of two circuit breakers on a single support and.g. made up of a metal frame and of the leverisms to interlock.

The shunt opening and undervoltage releases are housed in the special slot made in the neutral pole for the four-pole circuitbreakers. supplied with the residual current release. “Pure” residual current circuit-breakers are only sensitive to the earth fault current and are generally applied as main switch-disconnectors in small distribution switchboards towards end users. T2 and T3 circuit-breakers. T4D and T5D switch-disconnectors. T3D. They are constructed using electronic technology and act directly on the circuit-breaker by means of a trip coil. ensur e protection of people against indirect and direct earth contacts to fulfil the compulsory measures foreseen by the accident prevention regulations and prescriptions. In particular. Apart from the protection against overloads and short-circuits typical of automatic circuit-breakers. T2 and T3 circuit-breakers can be combined with the new version of the SACE RC221 or RC222 series of residual current releases and four-pole T4 and T5 with RC222 or RC223 to be installed below the circuit-breaker. to be housed in the special slot made in the left-hand pole area. The use of “pure” and “impure” residual current circuit-breakers allows continual monitoring of the state of plant insulation. thereby ensuring protection against direct contacts. The RC221 and RC222 residual current releases can either be supplied from above or from below.Accessories Residual current releases . 3 RC221 and RC222 residual current releases for T1. the residual current circuit-breakers derived from them also guarantee protection of people and protection against earth fault currents. A disconnection device of the power supply during the insulation test is available.IEC only All the Tmax series of circuit-breakers are preset for combined assembly with residual current releases. T2 and T3 The RC221 and RC222 residual current releases can be installed either on the Tmax T1. one which only guarantees residual current protection and not the protections typical of circuit-breakers. in the fixed version. i. whereas they are incompatible with the three-pole circuit-breakers. the Tmax T1. All the possible connection combinations are allowed. ensuring efficient protection against fire and explosion hazards and. 3/38 1SDC210315F0023 1SDC210314F0023 ABB . The four-pole circuit-breaker complete with residual current release can be fitted with the electrical accessories normally available for the circuit-breaker. connection of the neutral to the first pole on the left. They do not require an auxiliary power supply as they are supplied directly by the network and their operation is guaranteed even with only a single phase plus neutral or only two phases supplied with voltage and in the presence of unidirectional pulsating currents with direct components. The versions available make their use possible both with three-pole and four-pole circuit-breakers. The residual current releases are constructed in compliance with the following Standards: – IEC 60947-2 appendix B – IEC 60255-3 (SACE RCQ and RC223) and IEC 61000: for protection against unwarranted release – IEC 60755 (SACE RCQ): for insensitivity to direct current components. when the devices have I n 30 mA. The residual current releases can also be mounted on the Tmax T1D. indirect contacts and fire hazards. in the four-pole version. the derived apparatus is a “pure” residual current circuit-breaker. or on the T1D and T3D switch-disconnectors. except for guaranteeing. The operating conditions of the apparatus can be continually controlled by means of the electronic circuit test pushbutton and the magnetic indicator of residual current trip. In that case.e.

the FC Cu terminal semikit is always supplied (consult the code section on page 7/36). This release keeps the same technical characteristics as the normal RC222 for T1.The residual current releases are supplied complete with: – a trip coil to be housed in the area of the third pole. The operating conditions of the apparatus can be continually controlled by means of the electronic circuit test pushbutton and the magnetic indicator of residual current trip. The four-pole circuit-breaker complete with residual current release can be fitted with the electrical accessories normally available for the circuit-breaker. Its special shape also allows a reduction in the overall dimensions when two or more units are placed side by side. when the residual current release is ordered. allows installation in 200 mm modules. thereby ensuring simplification and rationalisation of the installation procedure. whilst the toroid is in the underneath position. for four-pole Tmax T1. in the four-pole version. thanks to its reduced height. This RC222 residual current release. complete with an auxiliary contact signalling residual current release trip – dedicated flange. it is possible to use an RC222 residual current release below the circuit-breaker. to be housed in the special slot made in the left-hand pole area. 1SDC210316F0023 3 RC222 residual current release for T4 and T5 With T4 and T5. it is also possible to 1SDC210317F0023 mount the rear horizontal flat terminal kit below (HR for RC221/RC222). The residual current release is supplied complete with: – a trip coil to be housed in the area of the third pole. ABB 1SDC210319F0023 1SDC210318F0023 3/39 . only front terminals for copper cables (FC Cu) at the bottom are mounted on the residual current releases. but it can also be combined with all the terminals available for the corresponding circuit-breaker. T2 and T3 but. The shunt opening and undervoltage releases are housed in the special slot made in the neutral pole for the four-pole circuitbreakers. It does not require an auxiliary power supply as they are supplied directly by the network and their operation is guaranteed even with only a single phase plus neutral or only two phases supplied with voltage and in the presence of unidirectional pulsating currents with direct components. The RC222 residual current release can either be supplied from above or from below. On the other hand. A distinguishing characteristic is provided by the type of cable connection which is made directly on the circuit-breaker. in the fixed version. Furthermore. making access to the adjustments on the left-hand side of the circuit-breaker available. can easily be converted into plugin by adding the special conversion kit. For this reason. The release is supplied with standard front terminals. All the possible connection combinations are allowed as long as there is that of the neutral to the first pole on the left. With Tmax T2 and T3. complete with an auxiliary contact signalling residual current release trip – dedicated flange. still for four-pole T1. supplied with the residual current release. The bracket for fixing onto DIN 50022 rail is available on request. The RC222 release is constructed using electronic technology and acts directly on the circuit-breaker by means of a trip coil. a version of the RC222 residual current release is available in 200 mm modules. once the residual current release has been mounted. A disconnection device of the power supply during the insulation test is available. The configuration foresees insertion of the circuit-breaker on the structure of the corresponding residual current release.

5 .even the most advanced ones .0 .1 .1 .. the RC223 also allows selection of the maximum threshold of sensitivity to the residual fault frequency (3 steps: 400 – 700 – 1000 Hz).05 .2 . The reference Standards are: IEC 60947-1.5 .Accessories Residual current releases .05 . It is characterised by the same types of reference as the RC222 (S and AE type) release. ABB 3/40 1SDC210320F0023 .1 . which guarantees sensitivity to residual fault currents with alternating. Apart from the signals and settings typical of the RC222 residual current release.1 .03 .03 .3 0.3 ..IEC only RC221 Circuit-breakers size Type Technology Action Primary service voltage (1) Operating frequency Self-supply Test operation range (1) Rated service current Rated residual current trip Time limt for non-trip Tolerance over trip times Local trip signalling Trip coil with changeover contact for trip signalling Input for remote opening NO contact for pre-alarm signalling NO contact for alarm signalling Indication of pre-alarm from 25% I n (tollerance ±3%) Indication of alarm timing at 75% I n (tollerance ±3%) Automatic residual current reset “A” type for pulsanting alternating current.0.3 .2 . AC for alternating current “AE” type for remote release device Selective “S” type Button for insulation test Power supply from above and below Assembly with three-pole circuit-breakers Assembly with four-pole circuit-breakers Kit for conversion of circuit-breaker with residual current release from fixed to plug-in (1) RC222 T1-T2-T3 “L” shaped microprocessor-based with solenoid 85…500 45…66 ■ 85…500 up to 250 A 0. Typical installations which may require frequency thresholds different from the standard ones (50 – 60 Hz) are the welding plants for the automobile industry (1000 Hz). alternating pulsating and direct current components.0.0.5 .3 .2 .0.03 .0.5 .2 .3 0.0.03 .0.05 .0.500 up to 250 A 0.10 RC223 T4 4p Placed below microprocessor-based with solenoid 110.1 0.0.5 .2 0. The range of operation of the primary line-to-line voltage of this residual current release varies between 110 V and 440 V. IEC 60947-2 Appendix B. It is therefore possible to adapt the residual current device to the different requirements of the industrial plant according to the prospective fault frequencies generated on the load side of the release. All the functions of the apparatus .5 .3 0.10 T4 and T5 Placed below microprocessor-based with solenoid 85…500 45…66 ■ 85…500 up to 630 A 0.5 .0.1 .2 .0. with operation starting from 55 V phase-neutral..0. ABB SACE is developing the RC223 (B type) residual current release..1 .can be checked by the user by means of a careful watchdog test which is carried out by a series of simple successive steps. which can only be combined with the Tmax T4 four-pole circuit-breaker in the fixed or plug-in version. and IEC 60755.1 .5 .0. airports and threephase drives (400 Hz).istantaneous .0.3 ± 20% ± 20% ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 3 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Operation up to 50 V Phase-Neutral RC223 (B type) residual current release for T4 Along with the family of residual current releases illustrated previously.0.1 .3 istantaneous istantaneous .0.1 istantaneous .3 .3 .0. the textile industry (700 Hz).500 0-1000 ■ 110.3 .1 0.1 . but can also boast conformity with type B operation.1 0.3 .0.1 .0.0.5 .3 ± 20% ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ T1-T2-T3 “L” shaped microprocessor-based with solenoid [V] [Hz] 85…500 45…66 ■ 85…500 [A] [A] [s] up to 250 A 0.

250 V AC 50/60 Hz N.03-0.O.03…30 0.5-0.C. It is particularly recommended when low sensitivity residual current protection is required.28” [185 mm] Toroidal transformer Ø 4. 1SDC210321F0023 3 Residual current relay Power supply voltage Operating frequency Trip threshold adjustment I n 1st range of adjustments 2nd range of adjustments Trip time adjustment Pre-alarm threshold adjustment Range of use of closed transformers Toroidal transformer Ø 2. N.5 1-3-5-10-30 0-0. The RCQ relay is of the type with indirect action and acts on the circuit breaker release mechanism by means of the shunt trip of the circuit breaker itself (to be ordered by the user).62 [A] [A] [s] [%] x I n 0.78 x 5. for alternating and/or pulsating current with direct components (Type A) and allows residual current selectivity to be set up.03…30 1…30 Yellow flashing LED 1 N.03…30 0.06” [230 mm] Signalling for alarm pre-threshold Residual current relay trip signalling Remote opening control Connection to the toroidal transformer Dimensions L x H x D Drilling for assembly on door [in] [in] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] 0. The RCQ relay is suitable for use in the presence of alternating currents only (Type AC). In case of drops in the auxiliary power supply voltage.33” [110 mm] Toroidal transformer Ø 7.09” [180 mm] Toroidal transformer Ø 9. to be housed in the special slot made on the left-hand pole of the circuit breaker. the RCQ relay is suitable for applications where a system of residual current protection coordinated with the various distribution levels.3-0.62 x 3.7-1-2-3-5 25…75% x I n AC [V] DC [V] [Hz] RCQ 80…500 48…125 50 ÷ 60 Hz ± 10% Range of use of transformers which can be opened ABB 3/41 .78 x 3..O.O.SACE RCQ residual current relay The Tmax T1. and for high sensitivity applications (physiological sensitivity).1-0. N. the opening control intervenes after a minimum time of 100 ms and after the time set plus 100 ms. or limited space in the circuit breaker compartment.3-0. such as in partial (current) or total (chronometric) selective chains. and Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers can be combined with the RCQ relay with separate toroid (to be installed externally on the line conductors) and these fulfill requirements with thresholds up to 30 A trips and times up to 5 s or when the installation conditions are particularly restrictive. T3 T4 and T5.05-0.03…30 0.36” [60 mm] Toroidal transformer Ø 4.1-0. Thanks to the wide range of settings.250 V AC 50/60 Hz Yellow magnetic flag change-over contacts (N. such as with circuit breakers already installed. change-over contact 6 A .33” [110 mm] Toroidal transformer Ø 7. Maximum length: 1270 in 3.O. contact Trip time 15 ms By means of 4 twisted conductors.) 6 A .1…30 0. T2.18 3.2-0.

in accordance with what has been set manually. which allows remote closing or opening operation of the circuit breaker (Remote Control) by means of two digital outputs which can be disabled thanks to the dip-switch (LOC/REM) positioned on LOC. electronic or remote reading and writing (ELT) – circuit breaker commands: opening. and can be used with the Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers fitted with PR212/P electronic trip unit. both in the LSI and LSIG versions. tripped L-S-I-G-R-V-PTC measurements: currents. 3 3/42 ABB . Information available – – – – State of the circuit breaker: open. Communication towards the outside is generally addressed to a supervision and control unit.Accessories Accessories for electronic trip units SACE PR212/D-M Modbus and PR212/D-L Lon dialogue unit for S6 and S7. reset. the PR212/P protection unit works according to the last parameters set and. N° operations. They must be supplied with a stabilized voltage of 24 V DC (±20% with maximum ripple ±5%) and be earthed. The PR212/D-M and PR212/D-L dialogue units are always fitted in combination with the PR212/T actuator unit. ABB has built two distinct dialogue units able to support two different communication protocols: PR212/D-M (Modbus RTU protocol) and PR212/D-L (LonTalk protocol by Echelon). tripped installation alarms: pre-alarm L. which can be installed on DIN rails. Both units are housed in external modules. In the case of an error in the serial communication due to a fault in the dialogue unit or lack of auxiliary power supply. N° trips reading and writing curves and trip thresholds: only manual reading (MAN). closed. which has the task of collecting and storing the information regarding the part of the plant controlled.(IEC only) The dialogue unit is a device which allows two-way communication from the circuit breaker to the outside and vice versa. in any case. closing.

which allows connection of the device to the test input bushings located on the bottom of the electronic trip unit. on the basis of which the relative power contacts are closed to signal: – pre-alarm for protection function L (I>0.9 x I1) – protection function L. An auxiliary power supply is needed to operate the unit. to the inputs of the PR212/T actuator unit. The motor operator of the circuit breaker (use the versions with power supply voltage at 110 V AC/DC or 220 V AC) must be connected to these relays. 3 1SDC210323F0023 SACE PR212/K signalling unit for S8 The PR212/K signalling unit. The limited dimensions of the accessory make it practically pockettype. PR212/P. with maximum ripple ±5%) and earthed is required for operation of the unit. The PR212/D dialogue unit sends the digital opening and closing commands. PR222DS/P and PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip unit and the trip test of the trip coil. An auxiliary power supply with a stabilized voltage of 24 V DC (±20%. G trip – trip indication – communication error with protection unit. It is connected to the internal bus of the protection unit by means of a dedicated serial line over which the information regarding the state of activation of the protection functions passes. PR221DS. 1SDC210322F0023 SACE TT1 Test unit This allows control of tripping of the PR211/P.SACE PR212/T actuator unit for S6 and S7 The PR212/T actuator unit allows circuit breaker opening and closing by means of the motor operator mounted on the circuit breaker.(LSIG) protection unit into electric signals by means of normally open electrical contacts. is able to convert the digital signals supplied by the PR212/P . S. I. which carries out circuit breaker closing and opening by means of a power relay. It is always supplied in combination with the PR212/D dialogue unit for Isomax S6 and S7. ABB 1SDC210324F0023 3/43 . only available for Isomax S8. received from the supervision and control system. The device is supplied by means of a 12 V replaceable battery and is fitted with a two-pole polarized connector-tracer point housed on the bottom of the box.

The unit is connected to the protection release by means of the Modbus RTU standard serial changeover line. via normally open electrical contacts. The corresponding power contacts are closed based on this information.O. and even after Note: the PR021/K unit is an alternative to any supervision and control systems. on which all the information about the activation status of the protection functions flows. The table indicates the characteristics of the signalling relays available in the SACE PR021/K unit.O.Accessories Accessories for electronic trip units SACE PR021/K signalling unit The SACE PR021/K signalling unit can convert the digital signals supplied by the PR222DS/PD-A (LSI or LSIG) protection unit into electrical signals. 3/44 ABB . the release is tripped.3 A until the release is tripped Breaking capacity (resistive load) @ 250 V AC 5A – the trip signals of the protecContact/coil insulation 2000 V eff (1 min @ 50 Hz) tions remain active during the timing phase. Breaking capacity (resistive load) @ 30 V DC 3. the following sigPR021/K (PR222DS/PD-A) nals are available: Maximum changeover power (resistive load) 100W / 1250 VA (resistive load) – the alarm signal remains acMaximum changeover voltage 130 V DC / 250 V AC Maximum changeover current 5A tive throughout the overload. The unit also has ten LEDs to visually signal the following information: – “Power ON”: auxiliary power supply present – “TX (Int Bus)”: flashing synchronised with dialogue with the internal Bus – eight LEDs associated with the internal contacts. PTC alarm (temperature sensor on motor) Generic input 0/1(*) Release trip Protection L pre-alarm Back-up protection alarm (*) PR222MP K51 1 2 3 4 5 6-7 8 PR222DS Protection L alarm Protection S alarm Protection I alarm Protection G alarm Bus K. Available signals K51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Protection L alarm Protection R alarm Protection I alarm Protection U alarm Welded conctactor alarm contacts (*) Bus K. In particular. Release trip Protection L pre-alarm 3 (*) alternatively by means of dip-switch. A reset pushbutton allows the state of all the signals to be reset.

SACE PR010/T Test and Configuration Unit
The PR010/T unit is an instrument able to carry out the Test, programming and parameter readout functions for the protection units which equip the Tmax, the Isomax S molded case circuit breakers and the Emax air circuit breakers. In particular, for circuit breakers fitted with PR212/P and PR222DS/P trip units, the test, programming and readout parameter functions are available. All the functions mentioned can be carried out ON BOARD by connection of the PR010/T unit to the multipin front flange connector on the protection unit; connection is guaranteed by means of special interfacing cables supplied as standard with the unit. The human-machine interface is guaranteed by using a membrane keyboard and a multi-line alphanumerical display. There are also two LEDs on the unit which signal the following respectively: – POWER-ON and STAND BY situation – situation of the battery charging state. Two different types of Test are provided: automatic and manual. By means of connection to the PC (software provided), it is also possible to upgrade the SW of the PR010/T unit to allow adaptation of the Test unit to evolution of new products. The most relevant test results can also be stored in the unit itself and sent to the Personal Computer on explicit request for “issue of report”. Both in automatic and manual mode, the PR010/T unit is able to test the following: – protection functions L, S, I, G – monitoring of correct operation of the microprocessor. The same Tests can also be repeated using the manual method. The PR010/T unit is of the portable type and operates with rechargeable batteries and/or with an external power supply. In its standard supply, the unit includes: – PR010/T Test unit complete with rechargeable batteries – TT1 Test unit; – 100...240 V AC/12 V DC external power supply – connection cables between the unit and the multipin connector present on the ranges of releases which equip the Isomax S and the Emax series – connection cable between the unit and the PC (serial RS232) – power supply cable – instruction manual and software – plastic case.

1SDC210325F0023

3

EP 010 - FBP
It is the “e-plug” interface which can connect T4 and T5, equipped with the PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip unit, to the field bus plug system, allowing user to choose among several field bus system (ASI, Device Net, Profibus). It must be connected to the trip unit by means of the specific X3 connector.

ABB

1SDC210326F0023

3/45

Accessories
Accessories for electronic trip units

Front display unit - FDU
The front display is a display unit of the setting currents, alarms and parameters of the PR222DS/P and PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip units of T4 and T5. The display unit can operate correctly with selfsupply with I 0.35 x In on at least one phase. If the display is used in combination with the PR222DS/PD-A trip unit, and therefore with an auxiliary power supply, it is also possible to detect the protection, which has caused the trip unit intervention and the fault current. It is not compatible with the front accessories: rotary handle operating mechanism, motor operator and front for lever operating mechanism.

1SDC210327F0023

CT for external neutral (UL file: E116596)

CT ext
T4 T5 S6 S7 100 300 600 1000 150 400 800 1200 250 600 S8 1600 2000 2500

3

This is mounted onto the external neutral conductor and allows protection against earth faults with three-pole circuit breakers. The circuit breaker must be fitted with PR212/P – LSIG, PR222DS/P or PR222DS/PD-A trip units. The transformer must be connected to the trip unit by means of the specific X3-X4 connectors, selected according to the version of the circuit breaker and the type of protection trip unit used.

Connectors
Connectors X3 and X4 allow connection of the electronic trip unit with external plant units or components. In fact, they are used to make the L alarm signal available outside or to realise connection to the PR021/K signalling unit. Both connectors are available for fixed and plug-in or draw out version circuit breakers.
Connector X3 Function PR021/K L alarm signal Dialogue Auxiliary supply EP 010 X4 External neutral Trip unit PR222DS/PD-A and PR211/P, PR212/P PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD-A, PR211/P, PR212/P PR222DS/PD-A, PR212/D PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD-A PR222DS/PD-A PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD-A, PR212/P

3/46

ABB

Accessories
Installation and testing accessories

Bracket for fixing on DIN rail
This is applied to the fixed circuit breaker and allows installation on DIN rails (1.38”/35 mm). It simplifies assembly of circuit breakers up to 225 A (Tmax T1, T2 and T3, except for T1B 1p) in standard switchboards. The bracket for fixing onto DIN rails is also available for Tmax circuit breakers combined with RC221 and RC222 residual current releases or with the solenoid operating mechanism of the side-by-side type.

1SDC210328F0023

Flange for compartment door
For Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers with the rotary handle operating mechanism, front for lever operating mechanism and motor operator, a special flange is supplied for the purpose. All the flanges of the Tmax series (to be ordered) are of new conception and do not require the use of screws for their installation: fixing is greatly simplified by means of a simple dove-tailing operation. In the case of use of a rotary handle operating mechanism, solenoid operating mechanism or residual current releases, a special dedicated flange is supplied. For T4 and T5 draw out circuit breakers, the flange supplied with the conversion kit must be used instead of the one supplied with the fixed circuit breaker.

1SDC210329F0023

3

1SDC210331F0023

1SDC210330F0023

T1-T5

S6-S7 fixed

S6-S7 draw out

S8

1SDC210332F0023

1SDC210334F0023

ABB

1SDC210333F0023

3/47

1SDC210335F0023

Accessories
Spare parts

Spare parts
With Tmax series, the following spare parts are available: – opening solenoid for the RC221 and RC222 residual current releases – opening solenoid for PR221DS electronic trip unit – kit with washers, screws and plugs for assembly of the front terminals (F) – flange for compartment door. For further details, please ask the Service Division of ABB for the spare parts catalogue.

3

3/48

ABB

Accessories
Controller for automatic transfer switch - ATS010

Control for automatic transfer switch - ATS010 (IEC only)
The ATS010 controller is the new network-group switching device offered by ABB. It is based on microprocessor technology in compliance with the leading electromagnetic compatibility and environmental standards (EN 50178, EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2, IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, IEC 60068-2-3). The device is able to manage the entire switching procedure between the normal line and emergency line circuit breakers automatically, allowing great flexibility of settings. In case of fault in the normal line voltage, in accordance with the delays set, the normal line circuit breaker is opened, the generator started and the emergency line circuit breaker closed. Similarly, when the normal line returns to range, the reverse switching procedure is automatically controlled. It is especially suited for use in all emergency power supply systems requiring a solution that is ready to install, easy to use and reliable. Some of the main applications include: power supply for UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply) units, operating rooms and primary hospital services, emergency power supply for civilian buildings, airports, hotels, data banks and telecommunications systems, power supply of industrial lines for continuous processes. The switching system consists of the ATS010 unit connected to two motor-driven and mechanically interlocked circuit breakers. Tmax T4 and T5, and Isomax S6 and S7 circuit breakers can be used. The built-in main sensor of the ATS010 device makes it possible to detect faults in the mains voltage. The three inputs may be directly connected to the three phases of the normal power supply line for networks with rated voltage up to 500 V AC. Networks with a higher voltage require the insertion of potential transformers (PT), setting a rated voltage for the device that matches their secondary voltage (typically 100 V). Two change-over contacts for each circuit breaker connect directly to the motor operator. The circuit breaker connection is completed by wiring the status contacts: Open/Closed, Relay tripped, Rackedin (for draw out/plug-in circuit breakers). That is why on every circuit breaker connected to the ATS010 unit, the following are included in addition to the mechanical interlock accessories: – motor operator from 48 V to 110 V DC or up to 250 V AC – open/closed contact – relay tripped contact – racked-in contact (for draw out versions) – signal and mechanical lock for protection relay tripped. On the motor operator for S6 and S7, the key lock is needed. The ATS010 device is designed to ensure extremely high reliability for the system it controls. It contains various safety systems intrinsically related to software and hardware operation. For software safety, a special logic prevents undesired operations, while a constantly operative watchdog system points out any microprocessor malfunctions via a LED on the front of the device. Hardware safety allows integration of an electrical interlock via power relay, so that there is no need to use an external electrical interlock system. The manual selector on the front of the device can also control the entire switching procedure, even in the event of a microprocessor fault, by working electromechanically on the control relays.

1SDC210336F0023

3

ABB

3/49

ATS010 General specifications Rated supply voltage (galvanically insulated from earth) Maximum absorbed power Rated power (mains present and circuit breakers not controlled) Operating temperature Maximum humidity Storage temperature Protection rating Protection rating Weight [mm] [kg] 24 V DC ±20% 48 V DC ±10% (maximum ripple ±5%) 5 W @ 24 V DC 10 W @ 48 V DC 1.8 W @ 24 V DC 4.8 Setting range for thresholds and times Minimum voltage Maximum voltage Fixed frequency thresholds t1: opening delay of the normal line circuit breaker due to network error t2: generator start-up delay due to network error t3: stopping delay of the generator t4: switching delay due to network stop t5: closing delay of the emergency line circuit breaker after detecting the generator voltage (CB-E) Un Min Un Max (CB-N) -5%…-30% Un +5%…+30% Un 10%…+10% fn 0…32s 0…32s 0…254s 0…254s 0…32s 3 Operating sequence VN ok CB-N on GE start Caption VN Main voltage CB-N Normal line circuit breaker closed GE Generator VE Emergency line voltage CoCo Enable switching to emergency line CB-E Emergency line circuit breaker closed LOAD Disconnection of lower priority connected loads t2 t1 t3 VE ok CoCo on CB-E on LOAD off t5 t4 3/50 ABB .5 W @ 48 V DC -25 °C…+70 °C 90% without condensation -25 °C…+80 °C IP54 (front panel) 144 x 144 x 85 0.Accessories Controller for automatic transfer switch .

and overvoltage thresholds 2 Dip-switches to set: – rated voltage – normal single-phase or three-phase line – mains frequency – switching strategy 3 Switching delay time settings for T1…T5 3 Front panel 1SDC210337F0023 2 1 3 5 7 4 6 1SDC210338F0023 Caption 1 Status of the ATS010 unit and logic 2 Operating mode selector 3 Normal line check 4 Normal line circuit breaker status 5 Voltage on the emergency line 6 Emergency line circuit breaker status 7 Generator status ABB 3/51 .Side panel settings 1 2 3 Caption 1 Selectors to set the under.

Characteristic curves and technical information

Index
Characteristic curves
Examples of curve readout .................................................................................................... 4/2 Trip curves for distribution Circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip units .................................................................... 4/4 Circuit breakers with electronic trip units ............................................................................ 4/11 Trip curves for MCP Circuit breakers with magnetic only trip units ...................................................................... 4/17 Circuit breakers with PR221DS-I electronic trip unit ........................................................... 4/18 Specific let-through energy curves (1) 240 V .................................................................................................................................... 4/19 480 V .................................................................................................................................... 4/22 600 V .................................................................................................................................... 4/25 Limitation curves 240 V .................................................................................................................................... 4/28 480 V .................................................................................................................................... 4/31 600 V .................................................................................................................................... 4/34

4

Technical information
Temperature performances Circuit breakers with electronic trip units ............................................................................ 4/37 Circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip units .................................................................. 4/38 Power losses ...................................................................................................................... 4/40

(1)

For the T1 1P characteristic curves, please ask ABB directly

ABB

4/1

Examples of curve readout

Example 1 Trip curves for distribution (thermomagnetic trip unit)
Considering a S6N 800 TMD In = 800 A circuit breaker. By means of the thermal adjustment trimmer, the current threshold I1 is selected, for example at 0.8 x In (640 A); the magnetic trip threshold I3, adjustable from 5 to 10 x In, we select at 8 x In, equal to 6400 A. It can be noted that, on the basis of the conditions in which the overload is presented, i.e. with the circuit breaker at thermal running or not, the thermal relay trip varies considerably. For example, for an overload current of 2 x I1, the trip time is between 31 and 141.6 s for hot trip, and between 141.6 and 885 s for cold trip. For fault current values higher than 6400 A, the circuit breaker trips instantaneously with the magnetic protection.
t [s] 104

S6 N 800

103

~885

~141.6 102 ~31 10

2 x I1 1

10-1

10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1

4

Example 2 Current-limiting curves
The following figure shows the trend of the Tmax T2H 100, In = 100 circuit breaker current-limiting curves. The r.m.s. of the prospective symmetrical short-circuit current is indicated on the abscissa of the diagram, whereas the peak short-circuit current value is indicated on the ordinates. The current-limiting effect can be assessed by comparing, at the same symmetrical short-circuit current value, the corresponding peak value at the prospective shortcircuit current (curve A) with the limited peak value (curve B). The T2H 100 circuit breaker with In 100 thermomagnetic trip unit at a voltage of 480 V, limits the shortcircuit current to 12.2 kA for a fault current of 30 kA, with a reduction of about 50.8 kA compared with the peak value of the 63 kA prospective short-circuit current. 4/2
Ip [kA] 102 63

T2H 100
Curve A

50.8 Curve B 12.2 10

1

10-1 10-1

1

10

30

102

103 Is [kA]

ABB

1SDC210002F0023

1SDC210001F0023

Example 3 Specific let-through energy curve
An example of reading the graph of the specific let-through energy curve of the T4V 250 In = 80 circuit breaker at a voltage of 490 V is given aside. The prospective symmetrical shortcircuit current is indicated on the abscissa of the diagram, whereas the ordinates show the specific letthrough energy values expressed in [kA]2s. In correspondence with a short-circuit current of 100 kA, the circuit breaker lets through a value of I2t equal to 0.7 [kA] 2s (700000 A2s).
I2t [(kA)2s] 10

T4V 250

1

0.7

10-1

10-2 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA]

Abbreviations used In = I1 = I3 = Irms = Ampère rating of the thermomagnetic or electronic trip unit Long-time pick-up setting instantaneous pick up setting prospective symmetrical short-circuit current

1SDC210003F0023

4

ABB

4/3

Trip curves for distribution
Circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip units

T1 100 - T1 100 1P TMF
In = 15 ÷ 70 A

t [s]

104

103

102

10

1

10-1
40A 60A 30A 70A 50A 25A 20A
1SDC210004F0023

15A

10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1

T1 100 - T1 100 1P TMF

t [s]

104

4

In = 80 ÷ 100 A
103

102

10

1

10-1
90A 100A 80A
1SDC210005F0023

10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1

4/4

ABB

T2 100 TMF In = 15 ÷ 50 A t [s] 104 103 102 10 1 10-1 40A 50A 30A 25A 20A 15A 1SDC210006F0023 35A 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1 T2 100 TMF In = 60 ÷ 100 A t [s] 104 4 103 102 10 1 10-1 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1 ABB 1SDC210007F0023 4/5 .

Trip curves for distribution Circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip units T3 225 TMF In = 60 ÷ 100 A t [s] 104 103 102 10 1 60÷100A 10-1 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1 T3 225 TMF t [s] 104 4 In = 125 ÷ 225 A 103 102 10 1 125÷225A 10-1 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1 4/6 ABB 1SDC210009F0023 1SDC210008F0023 .

50 TMD t [s] 104 103 102 10 1 10-1 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1 T4 250 TMA In = 80 ÷ 250 A t [s] 104 1SDC210010F0023 In=15A In=20A In=30A In=40A In=50A I3=500A I3=500A I3=500A I3=500A I3=500A 4 103 102 10 1 10-1 I3=5…10 x In 1SDC210011F0023 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1 ABB 4/7 . 40. 20 TMF In = 30.T4 250 TMF/TMD In = 20 ÷ 50 A In = 15.

5 In 103 102 10 1 600A 10-1 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1 4/8 ABB 1SDC210013F0023 . 400 A t [s] 104 103 102 10 1 10-1 I3=5…10 x In 1SDC210012F0023 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1 S6 800 TMD t [s] 104 4 In = 600 A I3 = 2.Trip curves for distribution Circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip units T5 400 TMA In = 300.

S6 800 TMD In = 600 A I3 = 5 ÷ 10 In t [s] 104 103 102 10 1 600A 10-1 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1 S6 800 TMD In = 800 A I3 = 2.5 In t [s] 104 1SDC210014F0023 4 103 102 10 1 800A 10-1 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1 ABB 4/9 1SDC210015F0023 .

Trip curves for distribution Circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip units S6 800 TMD In = 800 A I3 = 5 ÷ 10 In t [s] 104 103 102 10 1 800A 10-1 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1 4 4/10 ABB 1SDC210016F0023 .

Trip curves for distribution Circuit breakers with electronic trip units T2 100 PR221DS-LS L-I Functions T2 100 PR221DS-LS L-S Functions 1SDC210017F0023 4 ABB 4/11 1SDC210018F0023 .

T5 400/600 4 PR221DS L-I Functions Note: For T5 In = 600 A ⇒ I3max = 9.5 x In 1SDC210019F0023 4/12 ABB 1SDC210005F0004 .Trip curves for distribution Circuit breakers with electronic trip units T2 100 PR221DS-I I Function T4 250 .

5 x In T4 250 .T4 250 .5 x In 1SDC210021F0023 4 ABB 4/13 1SDC210022F0023 .T5 400/600 PR222DS/P and PR222DS/PD-A L-S-I Functions (I2t const = ON) Note: For T5 In = 600 A ⇒ I2max = 9.T5 400/600 PR221DS L-S Functions Note: For T5 In = 600 A ⇒ I2max = 9.5 x In I3max = 9.

T5 400/600 4 PR222DS/P and PR222DS/PD-A G Function I4=0.2…0.79 x In inhibition at 6 x In I4=0.5 x In I3max = 9.5…0.5 x In T4 250 .8…1.Trip curves for distribution Circuit breakers with electronic trip units T4 250 .T5 400/600 PR222DS/P and PR222DS/PD-A L-S-I Functions (I2t const = OFF) Note: For T5 In = 600 A ⇒ I2max = 9.00 x In inhibition at 8 x In 4/14 ABB 1SDC210024F0023 1SDC210023F0023 .49 x In inhibition at 4 x In I4=0.

S6 800 .S7 1200 PR211/P LI-I Functions S6 800 .S7 1200 S8 1600/2000/2500 PR212/P L-S (I2t ON)-I Functions 1SDC210025F0023 4 ABB 4/15 1SDC210026F0023 .

S7 1200 S8 1600/2000/2500 PR212/P L-S (I2t OFF)-I Functions 4 S6 800 .S7 1200 S8 1600/2000/2500 PR212/P G Function 4/16 ABB 1SDC210028F0023 1SDC210027F0023 .Trip curves for distribution Circuit breakers with electronic trip units S6 800 .

Trip curves for MCP Circuit breakers with magnetic only trip units T2-T3 100 MCP Adjustable magnetic only trip unit I3 = 6…12 x In 1SDC210029F0023 4 ABB 4/17 .

T5 400/600 4 PR221DS-I I Function Overload limit T4 320 .Trip curves for MCP Circuit breakers with PR221DS-I electronic trip unit T2 100 PR221DS-I I Function Overload limit T4 250 .T5 400 4/18 ABB 1SDC210006F0004 1SDC210047F0004 .T5 630 Overload limit T4 250 .

Specific let-through energy curves T1 100 240 V T2 100 240 V 1SDC210033F0023 4 ABB 4/19 1SDC210034F0023 .

Specific let-through energy curves T3 225 240 V I2t [(kA)2s] 10 225A 200A 175A 125A 90-100A 70-80A 60A 1 10-1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] T4 250 4 I2t [(kA)2s] 10 240 V 1 100-250A 80A 40-50A 20-25A 10-1 10-2 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] 4/20 ABB 1SDC210036F0023 1SDC210035F0023 .

T5 400/600 I2t [(kA)2s] 10 240 V 300-600A 1 10-1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] S6 800 .S7 1200 S8 1600/2000/2500 240 V I2t [(kA)2s] 103 1SDC210037F0023 4 S8 102 S7 10 S6 1 10-1 10-2 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] ABB 4/21 1SDC210038F0023 .

Specific let-through energy curves T1 100 480 V I2t [(kA)2s] 1 90-100A 70-80A 40-50-60A 25-30A 20A 15A 10-1 10-2 1 10 102 Irms [kA] T2 100 I2t [(kA)2s] 1 4 480 V 90-100A 70-80A 60A 40-50A 25÷35A 20A 10-1 15A 10-2 1SDC210039F0023 10-3 10-1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] 4/22 ABB 1SDC210040F0023 .

T3 225 480 V I2t [(kA)2s] 10 225A 200A 175A 125A 90-100A 70-80A 60A 1 10-1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] T4 250 480 V I2t [(kA)2s] 10 1SDC210041F0023 4 1 100-250A 80A 40-50A 20-25A 10-1 10-2 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] ABB 4/23 1SDC210042F0023 .

Specific let-through energy curves T5 400/600 480 V I2t [(kA)2s] 10 300-600A 1 10-1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] 4 S6 800 .S7 1200 S8 1600/2000/2500 480 V I2t [(kA)2s] 103 S8 102 S7 S6 10 1 10-1 10-2 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] 4/24 ABB 1SDC210044F0023 1SDC210043F0023 .

.225 600Y/347 V I2t [(kA)2s] 10 1SDC210064F0023 4 225A 125-200A 90-100A 70-80A 60A 1 10-1 10-2 1 10 102 Irms [kA] ABB 4/25 1SDC210065F0023 ..T1 R15...100 600Y/347 V I2t [(kA)2s] 1 70-80A 90-100A 40-50-60A 30A 20-25A 15A 10-1 10-2 1 10 102 Irms [kA] T3 R60.

Specific let-through energy curves T4 250 600 V I2t [(kA)2s] 10 1 100-250A 80A 40-50A 20-25A 10-1 10-2 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] T5 400/600 4 I2t [(kA)2s] 10 600 V 300-600A 1 10-1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] 4/26 ABB 1SDC210046F0023 1SDC210045F0023 .

S7 1200 S8 1600/2000/2500 600 V I2t [(kA)2s] 103 S8 102 S7 S6 10 1 10-1 10-2 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] 1SDC210047F0023 4 ABB 4/27 .S6 800 .

Limitation curves T1 100 240 V Ip [kA] 102 90-100A 70-80A 40-50-60A 10 25-30A 20A 15A 1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] T2 100 Ip [kA] 102 4 240 V 90-100A 70-80A 60A 10 40-50A 25÷35A 20A 15A 1 10-1 10-1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] 4/28 ABB 1SDC210049F0023 1SDC210048F0023 .

T3 225 240 V Ip [kA] 102 225A 200A 175A 125A 90-100A 70-80A 60A 10 1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] T4 250 240 V Ip [kA] 102 1SDC210050F0023 4 100-250A 80A 10 40-50A 20-25A 1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] ABB 4/29 1SDC210051F0023 .

S7 1200 - Ip [kA] 103 4 S8 1600/2000/2500 240 V S8 S7 102 S6 10 1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] 4/30 ABB 1SDC210053F0023 1SDC210052F0023 .Limitation curves T5 400/600 240 V Ip [kA] 102 300-600A 10 1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] S6 800 .

T1 100 Ip [kA] 102 480 V 90-100A 70-80A 40-50-60A 25-30A 10 20A 15A 1 1 10 102 Irms [kA] T2 100 480 V Ip [kA] 102 1SDC210030F0003 90-100A 70-80A 60A 40-50A 25÷35A 20A 4 10 15A 1 10-1 10-1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] ABB 4/31 1SDC210031F0003 .

Limitation curves T3 225 480 V Ip [kA] 102 225A 200A 175A 125A 90-100A 70-80A 60A 10 1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] T4 250 4 Ip [kA] 102 480 V 100-250A 80A 40-50A 20-25A 10 1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] 4/32 ABB 1SDC210057F0023 1SDC210056F0023 .

T5 400/600 480 V Ip [kA] 102 300-600A 10 1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] S6 800 .S7 1200 S8 1600/2000/2500 480 V Ip [kA] 103 1SDC210058F0023 4 S8 S7 102 S6 10 1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] ABB 4/33 1SDC210059F0023 .

100 600Y/347 V Ip [kA] 102 10 90-100A 70-80A 40-50-60A 25-30A 20A 15A 1 1 10 102 Irms [kA] T3 R60.225 4 Ip [kA] 102 600Y/347 V 225A 125-200A 10 90-100A 70-80A 60A 1 1 10 102 Irms [kA] 4/34 ABB 1SDC210067F0023 1SDC210066F0023 .....Limitation curves T1 R15.

T4 250 600 V Ip [kA] 102 100-250A 80A 40-50A 20-25A 10 1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] T5 400/600 600 V Ip [kA] 102 1SDC210060F0023 4 300-600A 10 1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] ABB 4/35 1SDC210061F0023 .

Limitation curves S6 800 .S7 1200 S8 1600/2000/2500 600 V Ip [kA] 103 S8 S7 102 S6 10 1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] 4 4/36 ABB 1SDC210062F0023 .

65 0.Temperature performances Circuit breakers with electronic trip units PR221DS PR211/P PR212/P PR222DS Imax [xIn] 1.75 0.95 0.85 0.05 1 0.8 0.9 0.7 0.6 95/35 104/40 113/45 122/50 131/55 149/65 140/60 158/70 Ambient temperature [°F/°C] 1SDC210063F0023 4 ABB 4/37 .

Temperature performances Circuit breakers with thermomagnetic trip units Tmax T1 and T1 1P In [A] 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 50 °F / 10 °C 18 24 29 35 47 60 71 83 94 106 121 68 °F / 20 °C 17 22 28 34 45 57 68 79 90 101 114 86 °F / 30 °C 16 21 27 32 43 53 64 75 85 96 107 104 °F / 40 °C 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 122 °F / 50 °C 14 19 23 28 37 46 56 65 75 84 92 140 °F / 60 °C 13 17 22 26 34 42 51 60 69 78 84 Tmax T2 In [A] 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 50 °F / 10 °C 18 24 30 35 40 46 56 71 83 96 109 115 68 °F / 20 °C 17 23 28 33 39 44 54 68 79 91 103 110 86 °F / 30 °C 16 21 27 32 37 42 52 64 75 86 97 105 104 °F / 40 °C 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 122 °F / 50 °C 14 18 23 28 33 38 48 56 65 74 83 95 140 °F / 60 °C 12 17 21 26 31 35 45 51 60 67 75 89 Tmax T3 4 In [A] 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 50 °F / 10 °C 70 82 92 104 117 145 175 205 236 264 68 °F / 20 °C 67 78 88 100 112 139 167 195 224 251 86 °F / 30 °C 64 74 84 95 106 132 159 185 213 239 104 °F / 40 °C 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 122 °F / 50 °C 56 66 75 85 94 118 141 164 187 211 140 °F / 60 °C 52 61 71 79 87 110 131 152 172 195 4/38 ABB .

Tmax T4
In [A] 20 25 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 50 °F / 10 °C 24 30 47 59 94 118 148 177 236 266 68 °F / 20 °C 22 28 44 56 90 112 140 168 224 252 86 °F / 30 °C 21 27 42 53 85 106 133 159 212 239 104 °F / 40 °C 20 25 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 225 122 °F / 50 °C 19 23 37 47 75 95 119 143 190 214 140 °F / 60 °C 17 21 34 43 68 85 106 127 170 191

Tmax T5 400/600
In [A] 300 400 600 50 °F / 10 °C 241…345 325…465 483…690 68 °F / 20 °C 230…328 310…442 459…656 86 °F / 30 °C 220…314 295…420 440…628 104 °F / 40 °C 210…300 280…400 420…600 122 °F / 50 °C 200…286 265…380 400…572 140 °F / 60 °C 187…267 250…355 374…534

Isomax S6
In [A] 600 800 50 °F / 10 °C 483…690 685…965 68 °F / 20 °C 459…656 640…900 86 °F / 30 °C 440…628 605…855 104 °F / 40 °C 420…600 560…800 122 °F / 50 °C 400…572 520…740 140 °F / 60 °C 374…534 470…670

4

ABB

4/39

Power losses

Type

Trip unit

In [A] 15 20 25 30 40

P [W/pole] 1.3 1.3 2.0 1.8 2.6 3.7 3.9 5.3 4.8 6.1 6.8 1.0 1.7 1.6 2.4 3.0 2.8 3.2 4.6 4.7 5.4 6.9 7.7 0.5 1.0 3.5 8.0 3.9 4.2 4.8 5.0 5.3 6.6 7.4 11.6 13.2 15.0 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.8 3.9 4.6 5.2 5.7 6.9 9.9 13.7 1.7 3.9 10.7 12.3 19.5 40.1 9.3 16.5 37.1

T1 - T1B 1p

TMF

50 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 10 25 63 100 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 15 20 30 40 50 80 100

TMF T2

ELT

4
T3 TMF

TMF

TMD

T4 TMA

125 150 200 250 100

ELT

150 200 300

TMA T5 ELT

400 600 300 400 600

4/40

ABB

Type

Trip unit TMD

In [A] 600 800 600 800 1200 1600 2000 2500

P [W/pole] 27.8 31.0 27.2 32.0 49.2 42.7 67.2 101.7

S6 ELT S7 S8 ELT ELT

4

ABB

4/41

Wiring diagrams

Index
Wiring diagrams
Graphic symbols (IEC 60617 and CEI 3-14...3-26 Standards) .............................................. 5/2

Tmax T1…T5
Information for reading .......................................................................................................... 5/3 Circuit diagrams ..................................................................................................................... 5/7 Electrical accessories ............................................................................................................ 5/9

Isomax S6, S7 and S8
Information for reading ........................................................................................................ 5/12 Circuit diagrams ................................................................................................................... 5/15 Electrical accessories .......................................................................................................... 5/16

5

ABB

5/1

. groung (general symbol) Make contact 5 Converter with galvanic separator Break contact Conductors in a screened cable. squirrel cage Thermal relay M Motor with series energization Operated by key Current transformer Instantaneous overcurrent or rate-ofrise relay Operated by cam Current transformer with four threaded winding and with one permanent winding with one tapping Overcurrent relay with adjustable short time-lag characteristic Hearth.3-26 Standards) Thermal effect Connection of conductors Position switch (limit switch).Wiring diagrams Graphic symbols (IEC 60617 and CEI 3-14. break contact Differential current relay Electromagnetic effect Terminal Position switch (limit switch) change-over break before make contact Phase-failure detection relay in a three-phase system Delay Plug and socket (male and female) Contactor (contact open in the unoperated position) Locked-rotor detection relay operating by current sensing Mechanical connection (link) Resistor (general symbol) Circuit breaker disconnector with automatic release Lamp. general symbol Manually operated control (general case) Temperature dependent resistor Switch-disconnector (onload isolating switch) Mechanical interlock between two devices Operated by turning Motor (general symbol) Operating device (general symbol) M Operated by electric motor Operated by pushing Induction motor. threephase. two conductors shown Change-over break before make contact Overcurrent relay with inverse short time-lag characteristic Overcurrent relay with inverse long time-lag characteristic Earth fault overcurrent relay with inverse short time-lag characteristic Twisted conductors.. two conductors shown Position switch (limit switch). make contact Phase-balance current relay 5/2 ABB .

with the following protection functions: . T4 and T5). Version The diagram shows a circuit breaker or MCS in the plug-in version (only T2.I against short-circuit with instantaneous trip time .L against overload with inverse long time delay . T3.G against earth fault with short time trip Motor for circuit breaker opening and circuit breaker closing spring charging Three-phase asynchronous motor Main circuit breaker Auxiliary circuit breaker contacts Resistor (see note F) Contacts controlled by the cam of the motor operator Contact controlled by the key lock of the solenoid operator or motor operator Contacts activated by the circuit breaker rotary handle (see note C) Contacts for electrical signalling of the protection functions of the electronic trip unit Contact for electrical signalling of overload in progress Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit breaker in racked-in position (only provided with circuit breakers in plug-in version) Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit breaker in racked-out position (only provided with circuit breakers in plug-in version) 5 M M1 Q Q/1…3 R S1.S against short-circuit with inverse or definite short time delay . plug-in or draw out version circuit breaker (depending on type of circuit breaker).Wiring diagrams Information for reading – Tmax T1…T5 State of operation represented The diagram is shown in the following conditions: – fixed. open and racked-in – contactor for motor starting open – circuits de-energized – releases not tripped – motor operator with springs charged (for T4 and T5).S against short-circuit with inverse short time delay . with auxiliary relays for electrical signalling of the protection functions of electronic trip unit PR212/CI type contactor control unit for motor starting Applications of the solenoid operator or motor operator Applications of the RC221 or RC222 type residual current release Indication apparatus and connections for control and signalling. but is also valid for the fixed and draw out version circuit breakers or MCS. H1 K K51 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Figure number of the diagram See note indicated by the letter Circuit breaker applications FDU unit (front display) AUX-E type auxiliary contacts. the applications indicated in figures 26-27-28-29-30-31 and 32 cannot be provided. with auxiliary relays for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open and circuit breaker tripped PR021/K type signalling unit. S2 S3 S4/1-2 K51/1…8 S51/S S75I/1…3 = = = = = = = = = = = S751S/1…3 = ABB 5/3 .L against overload with inverse long time delay . With the fixed version circuit breakers or MCS. with the following protection functions: .I against short-circuit with tempo of instantaneous trip – PR222DS/P or PR222DS/PD-A trip unit. Caption * A1 A11 A12 A13 A15 A2 A3 A4 D H. outside the circuit breaker Electronic time-delay device of the undervoltage release (outside the circuit breaker) Signalling lamps Contactor for motor starting Electronic trip unit: – PR221DS trip unit.

X4 = Connectors for the circuits of the electronic trip unit (in the case of circuit breakers in the plug-in version. YO2 or YU thermomagnetic trip unit intervention (tripped position) TI = Toroidal current transformer TI/L1 = Current transformer placed on phase L1 TI/L2 = Current transformer placed on phase L2 TI/L3 = Current transformer placed on phase L3 TI/N = Current transformer placed on the neutral W1 = Serial interface with the control system (EIA RS485 interface. See note E) X11 = Back-up terminal box X3. YO1.XC.XE = Interfacing connectors of the AUX-E unit XD = Interfacing connector of the FDU unit X0 = Connector for the YO1 trip coil X01 = Connector for the YO2 trip coil XV = Terminal boxes of the applications YC = Shunt closing release of the solenoid operator or motor operator YO = Shunt trip YO1 = Shunt trip coil of the electronic trip unit YO2 = Shunt trip coil of the RC221 or RC222 type residual current release YO3 = Shunt trip of the solenoid operator YU = Undervoltage release (see note B). 5/4 ABB .X2.X5…X9 = Connectors for the circuit breaker auxiliary circuits (in the case of circuit breakers in plug-in version.Wiring diagrams Information for reading – Tmax T1…T5 S87/1 S87/2 S87/3 5 = Contact for electrical signalling of RC222 type residual current release pre-alarm = Contact for electrical signalling of RC222 type residual current release alarm = Contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to RC221 or RC222 type residual current release trip SC = Pushbutton or contact for closing the circuit breaker SC3 = Pushbutton for motor starting SO = Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit breaker SO3 = Pushbutton for stopping the motor SQ = Contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open SY = Contact (bell alarm) for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to YO. removal of the connectors takes place simultaneously with that of the circuit breaker. removal of the connectors takes place simultaneously with that of the circuit breaker) XA = Interfacing connector of the PR222DS/P or PR222DS/PD-A trip unit XA1 = Three-way connector for YO/YU (see note E) XA10 = Three-way connector for solenoid operator XA2 = Twelve-way connector for auxiliary contacts (see note E) XA5 = Three-way connector for contact of electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to trip of the RC221 or RC222 type residual current release (see note E) XA6 = Three-way connector for contact of electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to trip of the overcurrent release (see note E) XA7 = Six-way connector for auxiliary contacts (see note E) XA8 = Six-way connector for contacts operated by the rotary handle or for the motor operator (see note E) XA9 = Six-way connector for the electrical signalling of RC222 type residual current release pre-alarm and alarm and for opening by means of the release itself (see note E) XB. See note D) X1.

Two electrical signalling contacts for RC222 type residual current release pre-alarm and alarm. Two changeover contacts for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open or closed.Description of figures Fig. Second position of circuit breaker changeover contact. for electrical signalling of isolated. and F). 6 Fig. YO1. One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open or closed and a changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to YO. 29 Fig. Undervoltage release with electronic time-delay device outside the circuit breaker (see note B). 22 = Fig. 25 Fig. 32 Fig. 28 Fig. YO2 or YU thermomagnetic trip unit intervention (tripped position). Solenoid operator. First position of circuit breaker changeover contact. 31 Fig. for electrical signalling of racked-in. 27 Fig. Fig. 3 Fig. 12 Fig. Auxiliary circuits of the PR222DS/P electronic trip unit connected with FDU front display unit. Third position of circuit breaker changeover contact. 10 Fig. 1 Fig. 24 Fig. One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to RC221 or RC222 type residual current release trip. 8 Fig. C. C. 5 Fig. 2 Fig. First position of circuit breaker changeover contact. 23 Fig. Circuit of the current transformer on neutral conductor outside the circuit breaker (for plug-in version circuit breaker). 41 = = = = = = = = = = = 5 ABB 5/5 . 4 Fig. Third position of circuit breaker changeover contact. 9 Fig. YO1. RC222 type residual current release. for electrical signalling of isolated. 26 Fig. Permanent shunt trip. for electrical signalling of racked-in. One changeover contact for electrical signalling of motor operator locked with key. YO2 and YU thermomagnetic trip unit intervention (tripped position). for electrical signalling of racked-in. 11 Fig. Instantaneous undervoltage release in version for machine tools with one contact in series (see note B. 21 = = = = = = = = = = = = = Shunt trip. 7 Fig. 30 Fig. Instantaneous undervoltage release in version for machine tools with two contacts in series (see note B. One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to trip unit intervention. One contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to trip unit intervention. and F). Instantaneous undervoltage release (see note B and F). Three changeover contacts for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open or closed and one changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker open due to YO. for electrical signalling of isolated. Stored energy motor operator. Second position of circuit breaker changeover contact.

in accordance with the Standards regarding machine tools (in any case. H) With MOS 110…250 V AC. I) SQ and SY are opto-insulated contacts.12 21 . only use MOS-A for 200 V ≤ Un ≤ 250 V. D) For connection of the EIA RS485 serial line. F) Additional external resistor for undervoltage release supplied at 250 V DC. Connectors X1. when the circuit breaker is to be removed. XA5. 380/440 V AC and 480/500 V AC. X2.6 .22 . X5. X6. B) The undervoltage release is supplied for power supply branched on the supply side of the circuit breaker or from an independent source: circuit breaker closing is only allowed with the release energised (the lock on closing is made mechanically). XA6. C) The S4/1 and S4/2 contacts shown in figures 5-6 open the circuit with the circuit breaker open and close it again when a manual closing command is given by means of the rotary handle. G) In the case of fixed version circuit breaker with current transformer on external neutral conductor outside the circuit breaker. see the following documentation: – ITSCE-RH0199 for MODBUS communication.11 10 .Wiring diagrams Information for reading – Tmax T1…T5 Incompatibility The circuits indicated by the following figures cannot be supplied at the same time on the same circuit breaker: 1-2-3-4-5-6 5 .23 24 . They are always supplied with T2 and T3 circuit breakers in the plug-in version. XA7. X8 and X9 are supplied on request. 5 5/6 ABB .11 10 . closing does not take place if the undervoltage release is not supplied).32 Notes A) The circuit breaker is supplied fitted with the applications specified in the ABB order confirmation.25 26 . X7. E) Connectors XA1. They are always supplied with circuit breakers in the plug-in version and with T4 and T5 circuit breakers in the fixed version. it is necessary to short-circuit the terminals of the TI/N transformer. XA2. XA8 and XA9 are supplied on request.

Wiring diagrams Circuit diagram – Tmax T1…T5 Tmax T1…T5 State of operation 1SDC210370F0023 Two pole. three-pole or four-pole circuit breaker with thermomagnetic trip unit Three-pole circuit breaker with magnetic trip unit 1SDC210370F0023 Three-pole or four-pole MCS (on-load isolating switch) 1SDC210370F0023 1SDC210370F0023 Three-pole or four-pole circuit breaker with PR222DS electronic trip unit Three-pole or four-pole circuit breaker with PR222DS/P or PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip unit 1SDC210371F0023 5 Three-pole or four-pole circuit breaker with RC221 or RC222 residual current release ABB 1SDC210371F0023 5/7 .

Wiring diagrams Circuit diagram – Tmax T1…T5 Tmax T1…T5 Fixed version three-pole circuit breaker with current transformer on neutral conductor. external to circuit breaker Plug-in or draw out version three-pole circuit breaker with current transformer on neutral conductor. external to circuit breaker 5/8 1SDC210372F0023 5 1SDC210372F0023 ABB .

Wiring diagrams Electrical accessories – Tmax T1…T5 Tmax T1…T5 Shunt opening and undervoltage releases Residual current releases and remote controls *I) + ~ A4 H SO SC *I) 11 1SDC210373F0023 XA8 X8 XV 54 5 54 54 A1 3 A1 A1 U1 4 U1 U1 C11 2 C11 C11 5 A17 S1 S2 A2 M YC S3 U2 XV X8 XA8 A4 ~ U2 1 ABB 5/9 1SDC210385F0023 U2 .

Wiring diagrams Electrical accessories – Tmax T1…T5 Tmax T1…T5 Auxiliary contacts Position contacts 5 5/10 ABB 1SDC210376F0023 1SDC210375F0023 .

PR222DS/P electronic trip unit connected with the FDU front display unit 1SDC210377F0023 5 ABB 5/11 .

with the following protective functions: . Caption * A1 A2 A4 A11 A12 A12/KC A12/KO A13 D H1 K51 = = = = = = = = = = = = = Reference number of diagram figure See note indicated by the letter Circuit breaker accessories Motor operator accessories Indicative devices and connections for control and signallings. The contact is also operated by the key lock device (if provided) Contact operated by the cam of the motor operating mechanism: it opens after closing of contact KO and it closes when the circuit breaker is in open position (it does not switch when the circuit breaker is in tripped position 5 K51/1…B K51/YO1 KO = = = M M1 Q Q/O…2 R1 S1 = = = = = = S2 = S3 = 5/12 ABB .I against short-circuit with instantaneous trip .I against short-circuit with instantaneous trip – PR212/P trip unit. with the following protective functions: .L against overload with inverse long time-delay trip . Versions The diagram indicates a circuit breaker or a MCS in draw out version but it may be applied to circuit breaker or a MCS in the fixed version too. with auxiliary relays for the execution of dialogue unit controls Closing control of the actuating unit Opening control of the actuating unit Signalling unit type PR021/K.L against overload with inverse long time-delay trip . S7 and S8 State of the operation represented The circuit is shown in the following conditions: – fixed.G against earth fault with inverse short time-delay trip Contacts for electrical indication of the electronic trip unit protective functions Alarm indication of YO1 release tripped (bell alarm) for overcurrent and for “trip test” Opening relay and spring charging device with a slay put make contact disengaged by a cam of the motor operating mechanism when the circuit breaker reaches the open position and the closing springs are charged Motor for the circuit breaker opening and for the closing springs charging Induction motor Main circuit breaker Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts Thermistor Contact operated by the cam of the motor operating mechanism: it closes when the circuit breaker is in closed position and it opens when the circuit breaker is in open position (it does not switch when the circuit breaker is in tripped position) Contact operated by the cam of the motor operating mechanism: it opens when the circuit breaker is in closed position and it closes when the circuit breaker is in open position (it does not switch when the circuit breaker is in tripped position). Circuits given in figures 21-22-23-24-25-31-32-33-34-35 cannot be supplied with circuit breaker or MCS in fixed version.Wiring diagrams Information for reading – Isomax S6.S against short-circuit with inverse or definite short time-delay trip . for connection with a central control system Actuating unit type PR212/T. open and racked in – circuits de-energized – releases not tripped – motor operator with springs loaded (for S6-S7 circuit breakers). plug in or draw out circuit breaker (depending on type of circuit breaker). external to the circuit breaker Dialogue unit type PR212/D-L or PR212/D-M. with auxiliary relays for electrical indication of the electronic trip unit protective functions Solid-state time-delaying device for undervoltage release (external to the circuit breaker) Signalling lamp Electronic trip unit: – PR211/P trip unit.

48. 8 Fig. 32 Fig. 6 Fig. 41 Fig. signalling the isolated position (see note D) Fourth circuit breaker position contact. 23 Fig. signalling the connected position (see note D) Third circuit breaker position contact. 48 Fig. ABB 5/13 . 49 and 50 are also valid for S8. to signalling unit type PR021/K and to the actuating unit type PR212/T Auxiliary circuits of the electronic trip unit PR212/P connected to signalling unit type PR021/K. Y0. Description of figures Fig. 13 = = = = = = = Shunt trip Instantaneous undervoltage release (see note B) Undervoltage release with solid-state time-delaying device external to the circuit breaker (see note B) Stored energy motor operator Two change-over contacts signalling circuit breaker on/off One change-over contact signalling circuit breaker on/off and one change-over contact signalling circuit breaker tripped through thermomagnetic YO. signalling the isolated position (see note D) Fifth circuit breaker position contact. signalling the connected position (see note D) Fourth circuit breaker position contact. 1 Fig. See note D) = Contacts signalling circuit breaker in the isolated position (provided with circuit breaker in draw out version only. 4 Fig. YO1. 22 Fig. 34 Fig. 41.SO2 SO3 SY TI/L1 TI/L2 TI/L3 TI/N W1 X1. 25 Fig. 4. 31 Fig. one contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker off and one contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker not tripped through thermomagnetic. signalling the connected position (see note D) First circuit breaker position contact. 49 Fig. YU releases operation (not tripped position) to be used for example. 35 Fig. YO. 12 Fig.S75I/1…5 S75S/1…5 SC SC3 SO SO1. 50 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 5 Note: figures are always valid for S6 and S7. signalling the connected position (see note D) Second circuit breaker position contact. See note D) = Pushbutton or contact for circuit breaker closing = Pushbutton for motor start = Pushbutton or contact for circuit breaker opening = Pushbutton or contact for circuit breaker opening = Pushbutton for motor stop = Contact signalling circuit breaker tripped through thermomagnetic. signalling the isolated position (see note D) Contact signalling YO1 releases operated (for electrical characteristics of the contact see note G) Auxiliary circuits of the electronic trip unit PR212/P connected to the dialogue unit type PR212/D-L or PR212/D-M and to the actuating unit type PR212/T Auxiliary circuits of the electronic trip unit PR212/P connected to the dialogue unit type PR212/D-L or PR212/D-M. X4 X5. 11 Fig. YU releases operation (bell alarm) = Current transformer located on the phase L1 = Current transformer located on the phase L2 = Current transformer located on the phase L3 = Current transformer located on neutral = Serial interface with the remote supervision and control system (see note E) = Connectors for the circuit breaker auxiliary circuits = Connectors for the electronic trip unit circuits (in case of circuit breaker in draw out plug-in version the racking-out of the connectors occur simultaneoustly with the one of the circuit breaker) = Delivery terminal boards for the electronic trip unit circuits = Connector for opening solenoid YO1 = Terminal boards of the accessories = Closing coil = Shunt trip = Shunt trip of electronic trip unit = Undervoltage release (see note B). YU releases operation (bell alarm) One contact for electrical signalling of circuit breaker on. 33 Fig. signalling the isolated position (see note D) Second circuit breaker position contact. figures 1. 24 Fig. Fig. for the accept contact reported in fig. signalling the connected position (see note D) Fifth circuit breaker position contact. 21 Fig. X6 XO XV YC YO YO1 YU = Contacts signalling circuit breaker in the connected position (provided with circuit breaker in draw out version only. 8 First circuit breaker position contact. Y01. YO1. signalling the isolated position (see note D) Third circuit breaker position contact. X2 X3.

B) Undervoltage release is suitable for circuit breaker supply side feeding or for feeding from an independent source: circuit breaker closes only if the undervoltage release is energized (lock on closing is achieved mechanically) D) Circuit breaker can be equipped with S75I and S75S position contact.33 24 .12 . 5 5/14 ABB .31 22 . see following documentation: – ITSCE-RH0298. in order to remove the circuit breaker it is necessary to short-circuit the terminals of TI/N current transformer G) Contact signalling electronic trip unit operated (see fig.Wiring diagrams Information for reading – Isomax S6. in whatever combination. 41) has the following electrical characteristics: – rated voltage = 24 V – breaking capacity (resistive load) = 3 W/VA – maximum current interrupted = 0.001 for Modbus – ITSCE-RH0297.32 23 .35 48 .001 for Lon F) In case of circuit breaker in fixed version with current transformer on external conductor.50 Notes A) Circuit breaker is supplied complete with the accessories listed in the ABB order acknowledgement only. with a maximum of 5 total contacts E) To connect the serial communication line to the remote supervision and control system.5 A.34 25 .49 . S7 and S8 Incompatibility The combinations of circuits given in the figures below are not possible on the same circuit breaker: 1-4-6 11 .13 21 .

three-pole or four-pole S6-S7 circuit breaker with PR211/P electronic trip unit Two-pole. external to circuit breaker Draw out version three-pole S6-S7 circuit breaker with current transformer on neutral conductor.Wiring diagrams Circuit diagrams – Isomax S6. with PR211/P (I) trip unit 1SDC210379F0023 1SDC210378F0023 5 S6-S7-S8 MCS threepole and four-pole Fixed version three-pole S6-S7-S8 circuit breaker with current transformer on neutral conductor. three-pole or four-pole S6 circuit breaker with thermomagnetic trip unit Two-pole. external to circuit breaker ABB 5/15 . three-pole or four-pole S6-S7 circuit breaker with PR212/P electronic trip unit S6-S7-S8 MCP three-pole. S7 and S8 Isomax S6-S7-S8 State of operation Two-pole.

Wiring diagrams Electrical accessories – Isomax S6. stored energy motor operator and auxiliary contacts Auxiliary contacts 5 5/16 ABB 1SDC210381F0023 1SDC210380F0023 . S7 and S8 Isomax S6-S7-S8 Service releases.

PR212/P trip unit connected to the dialogue unit PR212/D and actuator unit PR212/T PR212/P trip unit connected to the dialogue unit PR212/D signalling unit PR021/K and actuator unit PR212/T 1SDC210382F0023 5 ABB 5/17 1SDC210383F0023 .

Wiring diagrams Electrical accessories – Isomax S6. S7 and S8 Isomax S6-S7-S8 PR212/P trip unit connected to the signalling unit PR021/K 5 5/18 1SDC210384F0023 ABB .

........................................ 6/24 Plug-in circuit breaker/terminals .......................................... 6/44 Circuit breaker with residual current release T1.... T2 and T3 with residual current release ...........................................................................................................Overall dimensions Index Overall dimensions Tmax T1 and single-pole Tmax T1 Fixed circuit breaker/terminals ................................................................ 6/28 Draw out circuit breaker/terminals ...................................... 6/61 Isomax S7 .....................................................................................................................................................................................RC221/RC222 ...........................................................................................................................................................RC221/RC222 ..................................... 6/2 Tmax T2 Fixed circuit breaker/terminals ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6/19 Draw out circuit breaker/terminals .....................................................................T3 ....... 6/65 Isomax S8 ............................................................................................. 6/38 Isomax S7 Fixed circuit breaker/terminals ................................ 6/36 Draw out circuit breaker/terminals ...........................................................T5 .......................................... 6/50 Tmax T4 .................................................... 6/42 Isomax S8 Fixed circuit breaker/terminals ...................T2 ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6/13 Tmax T4 Fixed circuit breaker/terminals ........................................................ 6/69 Distances to be respected Tmax .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6/7 Tmax T3 Fixed circuit breaker/terminals ................................................................................................................. 6/22 Tmax T5 Fixed circuit breaker/terminals . 6/55 Isomax S6 ............................................................................................................................................. 6/71 ABB 6/1 6 ......................................... 6/32 Isomax S6 Fixed circuit breaker/terminals ....... 6/48 Accessories Tmax T1 ............... 6/16 Plug-in circuit breaker/terminals ................ 6/45 T4 and T5 with residual current release ................................................................................................................... 6/4 Plug-in circuit breaker/terminals .......................................................................................................... 6/10 Plug-in circuit breaker/terminals ............. 6/70 Isomax ........................................... 6/40 Draw out circuit breaker/terminals ..................................

Overall dimensions Tmax T1 and single-pole Tmax T1 Fixed circuit breaker Fixing on sheet [mm/in] Fixing on DIN EN 50022 rail 1SDC210400F0023 Without inserts 1SDC210401F0023 With inserts 5 Nm 1SDC210403F0023 0.8 Nm 1SDC210405F0023 1. without flange Bracket for fixing onto rail Bottom terminal covers with IP40 degree of protection Insulating plate Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals Without inserts With inserts 6 2 3 4 5 6/2 1SDC210407F0023 1SDC210408F0023 1SDC210402F0023 3 POLES 4 POLES T1 1P (SINGLE-POLE) ABB 1SDC210409F0023 .4 Nm T1 1P (SINGLE-POLE) 1SDC210404F0023 T1 1P (SINGLE-POLE) 1SDC210406F0023 Caption 1 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face not extending from the compartment door. with or without flange Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face extending from the compartment door.

06 Flange for the compartment door Drilling templates of the compartment door 1SDC210411F0023 1SDC210410F0023 With flange and circuit breaker face flush with door (3-4 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face flush with door (3-4 POLES) or extending (3 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face extending (4 POLES) 1SDC210412F0023 6 (SINGLE-POLE) ABB 6/3 1SDC210413F0023 .05 11.Terminals Front for copper/aluminium cables .37x0.12 103 4.08 X > _ 3 > _ 0.8 25.5 1 52 2.5 0.09 X 17 0.31 9.77 > _ 2 > _ 0.67 45 1.5x9.37 [mm/in] 71 2.45 104 4.FC CuAl 84 3.5 0.

8 Nm 0.8 Nm 1SDC210415F0023 Flange for the compartment door Drilling templates of the compartment door 1SDC210417F0023 With flange and circuit breaker face flush with door (3-4 POLES) Caption 1 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face not extending from the compartment door. with or without flange Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face extending from the compartment door. without flange Bracket for fixing onto rail Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Insulating plate 3 POLES Without flange and circuit breaker face flush with door (3-4 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face extending (3 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face extending (4 POLES) Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals For rear terminals 2 3 4 5 4 POLES 1SDC210419F0023 3 POLES 4 POLES 6/4 ABB 1SDC210420F0023 6 1SDC210418F0023 1SDC210416F0023 .Overall dimensions Tmax T2 Fixed circuit breaker Fixing on sheet [mm/in] Fixing on DIN EN 50022 rail 1SDC210414F0023 0.

55x0.6 Nm 1 1SDC210422F0023 1 1SDC210423F0023 Caption 1 2 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory) Insulating plate Front extended spread .Terminals Front .FC Cu Front for copper/aluminium cables FC CuAl 1/0 AWG/50 mm2 0.F Caption 1 2 Insulating base plate (compulsory) Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory) 1 2 6 Nm [mm/in] Front for copper cables .55 5.ES 1SDC210421F0023 6 Nm 18 Nm 1SDC210424F0023 6 ABB 6/5 .

Overall dimensions Tmax T2 Terminals Caption 1 2 High terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory without 1) Front extended .R 9 Nm 6/6 1SDC210426F0023 6 1SDC210425F0023 ABB .EF [mm/in] 9 Nm 6 Nm Caption 1 2 Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Insulating barriers between phases Rear .

with or without flange Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face extending from the compartment door.Plug-in circuit breaker Caption 1 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face not extending from the compartment door. degree of protection IP40 Fixing on sheet [mm/in] 2 3 4 1SDC210427F0023 Flange for compartment door Drilling templates of the compartment door 1SDC210428F0023 1SDC210429F0023 With flange and circuit breaker face flush with door (3-4 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face flush with door (3-4 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face extending (3 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face extending (4 POLES) Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals For rear terminals 1SDC210430F0023 6 1SDC210431F0023 1SDC210432F0023 3 POLES 4 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES ABB 6/7 . without flange Fixed part Moving part with terminal covers.

Overall dimensions Tmax T2 Terminals Front .25 6 6/8 ABB 1SDC210436F0023 .ES 1SDC210435F0023 6 Nm 18 Nm 57.F [mm/in] 6 Nm Front for copper cables .6 Nm 1SDC210434F0023 Caption 1 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory) Front extended spread .FC Cu Front for copper/aluminium cables FC CuAl 1/0 AWG/50 mm2 1SDC210433F0023 5.

EF 9 Nm 6 Nm Caption 1 Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Rear .[mm/in] Caption 1 2 High terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory without 1) Front extended .R 9 Nm 1SDC210437F0023 6 1SDC210438F0023 ABB 6/9 .

with or without flange Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face extending from the compartment door 3 4 5 Bracket for fixing on rail Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Insulating plate Flange for compartment door Drilling templates of the compartment door 1SDC210442F0023 1SDC210440F0023 With flange and circuit breaker face flush with door (3-4 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face flush with door (3-4 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face extending (3 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face extending (4 POLES) Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals For rear terminals 6 1SDC210444F0023 3 POLES 6/10 4 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES 1SDC210445F0023 ABB 1SDC210443F0023 1SDC210441F0023 .Overall dimensions Tmax T3 Fixed circuit breaker Fixing on sheet Fixing on DIN EN 50022 rail [mm/in] 1SDC210439F0023 Caption 1 2 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face not extending from the compartment door.

24 1SDC210446F0023 X X .28 9.11 FC CuAl 1/0 .49 300 Kcmil .5 0.ES 1SDC210448F0023 FC CuAl 45 1.8 1SDC210447F0023 58 2.12 2 0.37 6.4 AWG 3 0.57 12.08 103 4.06 Caption 1 2 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory) Insultating plate Front extended spread .2 0.3 0.F [mm/in] Front for copper cables .Terminals Caption 1 Insulating base plate (compulsory) Front .FC CuAl 84 3.77 6 1SDC210449F0023 ABB 6/11 .31 79 3. 116 4.FC Cu Front for copper/aluminium cables .14 AWG 1 71 2.

Overall dimensions Tmax T3 Terminals Caption 1 2 High terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory without 1) Insulating plate Front extended .EF [mm/in] 3 8 Nm 8 Nm Caption 1 2 Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Insulating plate Rear .R 9 Nm 6 Nm 6 1SDC210451F0023 6/12 1SDC210450F0023 ABB .

degree of protection IP40 1SDC210452F0023 [mm/in] Fixing on sheet 2 3 4 Flange for compartment door Drilling templates of the compartment door 1SDC210454F0023 With flange and circuit breaker face flush with door (3-4 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face flush with door (3-4 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face extending (3 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face extending (4 POLES) Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals For rear terminals 1SDC210455F0023 1SDC210453F0023 6 1SDC210456F0023 3 POLES 4 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES ABB 1SDC210457F0023 6/13 . without flange Fixed part Moving part with terminal covers.Plug-in circuit breaker Caption 1 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face not extending from the compartment door. with or without flange Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face extending from the compartment door.

FC Cu [mm/in] 8 Nm 1SDC210458F0023 Front for copper/aluminium cables FC CuAl 1/0 AWG/50 mm2 10 0.Overall dimensions Tmax T3 Terminals Front .39 Caption 1 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory) Front extended spread .F Front for copper cables .ES 1SDC210460F0023 1SDC210459F0023 18 Nm 6 6/14 1SDC210461F0023 8 Nm ABB .

[mm/in] Caption 1 2 High terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory without 1) 18 Nm Front extended .EF 8 Nm Caption 1 Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Rear .R 9 Nm 6 Nm 1SDC210462F0023 6 1SDC210463F0023 ABB 6/15 .

UVR-C. RC221-222) Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted (only 3Q 1SY) [mm/in] 2 1SDC210464F0023 Flange for compartment door Drilling templates of the compartment door 1SDC210466F0023 1SDC210465F0023 3-4 POLES With flange 1SDC210467F0023 3-4 POLES Without flange Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals For rear terminals 6 1SDC210469F0023 1SDC210470F0023 1SDC210471F0023 1SDC210472F0023 3 POLES 4 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES 6/16 1SDC210468F0023 ABB .Overall dimensions Tmax T4 Fixed circuit breaker Fixing on sheet Caption 1 Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted (SOR-C.

FC Cu 1SDC210473F0023 Front for copper/aluminium cables .ES 1SDC210478F0023 1SDC210479F0023 1SDC210476F0023 1SDC210477F0023 6 1SDC210480F0023 1SDC210481F0023 ABB 1SDC210482F0023 6/17 .MC 1SDC210475F0023 Caption 1 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory) Front extended spread .F [mm/in] Front for copper cables .Terminals Front .FC CuAl 1SDC210474F0023 Caption 1 2 3 Front terminals for cable connection 2x150 mm2 Front terminals for multicable connection High terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Front multicable .

Overall dimensions Tmax T4 Terminals Caption 1 2 High terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory without 1) Front extended .R 1SDC210483F0023 1SDC210484F0023 6 1SDC210485F0023 6/18 1SDC210487F0023 1SDC210486F0023 ABB .EF [mm/in] Caption 1 Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Rear .

RC221-222) Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted (only 3Q 1SY) Fixing on sheet [mm/in] 3 4 1SDC210488F0023 Flange for compartment door Drilling templates of the compartment door 1SDC210490F0023 1SDC210489F0023 With flange 1SDC210491F0023 Without flange Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals For rear terminals 1SDC210492F0023 6 1SDC210493F0023 1SDC210494F0023 1SDC210495F0023 1SDC210496F0023 3 POLES 4 POLES 3 POLES ABB 4 POLES 6/19 .Plug-in circuit breaker Caption 1 2 Fixed part Moving part with terminal covers. UVR-C. degree of protection IP40 Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted (SOR-C.

FC CuAl 1SDC210497F0023 6 6/20 1SDC210499F0023 1SDC210500F0023 1SDC210498F0023 ABB .Overall dimensions Tmax T4 Terminals Front .FC Cu or for copper/aluminium cables .EF [mm/in] Caption 1 2 3 For Cu cables For Cu Al cables High terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Front for copper cables .

VR Rear flat horizontal .ABB Rear flat vertical .HR 3-4 POLES 1SDC210501F0023 1SDC210503F0023 1SDC210505F0023 1SDC210502F0023 3-4 POLES 1SDC210504F0023 1SDC210506F0023 [mm/in] 6/21 6 .

UVR-C.Overall dimensions Tmax T4 Draw out circuit breaker Caption 1 2 3 4 Fixed part Moving part Lock for compartment door (available on request) Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted (SOR-C. RC221-222) Fixing on sheet [mm/in] isolating distance 1SDC210509F0023 Flange for compartment door Drilling templates of the compartment door 1SDC210510F0023 1SDC210507F0023 Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals For rear terminals 1SDC210512F0023 1SDC210513F0023 6 3 POLES 1SDC210513F0023 1SDC210511F0023 1SDC210508F0023 4 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES 6/22 ABB 1SDC210514F0023 .

HR 1SDC210516F0023 Front .FC CuAl 1SDC210520F0023 [mm/in] 6/23 1SDC210521F0023 6 .EF Terminals 3-4 POLES 1SDC210524F0023 1SDC210522F0023 1SDC210517F0023 1SDC210523F0023 Front for copper cables .VR 3-4 POLES 1SDC210527F0023 1SDC210525F0023 1SDC210526F0023 1SDC210519F0023 Front for copper/aluminium cables .ABB Rear flat horizontal .FC Cu 1SDC210518F0023 Rear flat vertical .

Overall dimensions Tmax T5 (400 A) Fixed circuit breaker Fixing on sheet Caption 1 Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted (SOR-C. UVR-C. RC221-222) Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted (only 3Q 1SY) [mm/in] 2 1SDC210528F0023 Flange for compartment door Drilling templates of the compartment door 1SDC210530F0023 1SDC210531F0023 1SDC210529F0023 With flange (3-4 POLES) Without flange (3-4 POLES) Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals For rear terminals 6 1SDC210533F0023 1SDC210534F0023 1SDC210535F0023 1SDC210536F0023 3 POLES 4 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES 6/24 1SDC210532F0023 ABB .

Terminals Front .ES 1SDC210543F0023 1SDC210541F0023 1SDC210544F0023 1SDC210545F0023 1SDC210542F0023 1SDC210539F0023 6 ABB 6/25 .FC Cu 1SDC210537F0023 1SDC210538F0023 Caption 1 High terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Front for copper/aluminium cables Cu/Al 300 mm2 FC CuAl Front for copper/aluminium cables Cu/Al 2x240 mm2 .FC CuAl 1SDC210540F0023 Caption 1 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory) Front extended spread .F [mm/in] Front for copper cables .

Overall dimensions Tmax T5 (400 A) Terminals Caption 1 2 High terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory without 1) Front extended .EF [mm/in] Caption 1 Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Rear .R 1SDC210546F0023 1SDC210547F0023 1SDC210550F0023 1SDC210549F0023 6 6/26 1SDC210548F0023 ABB .

RC221-222 11 Spacing when equipped with AUX-C (3Q 1SY only) With flange Without flange 107 107 60. UVR-C.5 A B C 115 115 64.5 6 ABB 6/27 .Overall dimensions Tmax T5 (600 A) Fixed circuit breaker Caption 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Front terminals for 2x240mm2 cable connection Compartment door sheet steel drilling Flange for the compartment door Fixing on sheet steel Tightening torque 2 Nm Tightening torque 31 Nm Terminal cover Insultating barrier + insulating plate Terminals support Fixing on sheet [mm/in] 10 Spacing when equipped with SOR-C.

RC221222) Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted (only 3Q 1SY) Fixing on sheet [mm/in] 3 1SDC210551F0023 4 6 6/28 1SDC210552F0023 ABB . UVR-C. degree of protection IP40 Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted (SOR-C.Overall dimensions Tmax T5 (400 A) Plug-in circuit breaker Caption 1 2 Fixed part Moving part with terminal covers.

54 Rear 400 A 32.28 ABB 6/29 .63 D 172.5 1.06 C 143 5.[mm/in] Flange for compartment door Drilling templates of the compartment door 1SDC210555F0023 With flange 1SDC210556F0023 Without flange Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals 3 POLES 1SDC210558F0023 4 POLES For rear terminals 1SDC210560F0023 1SDC210559F0023 1SDC210561F0023 1SDC210557F0023 3 POLES 4 POLES 6 A B 128.5 6.79 E 64.5 2.5 5.

EF [mm/in] Caption 1 2 3 Front terminals for cables Cu Front terminals for cables Cu/Al High terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Front for cables Cu and Cu/Al .FC Cu .Overall dimensions Tmax T5 (400 A) Terminals Extended front .FC Cu/Al 1SDC210562F0023 1SDC210563F0023 6 6/30 1SDC210566F0023 1SDC210567F0023 ABB .

ABB Rear flat horizontal .VR 1SDC210574F0023 1SDC210571F0023 1SDC210573F0023 1SDC210572F0023 1SDC210575F0023 1SDC210576F0023 [mm/in] 6/31 6 .HR Rear vertical .

RC221-222) 3 4 1SDC210584F0023 1SDC210585F0023 6 6/32 ABB 1SDC210586F0023 . UVR-C. degree of protection IP40 Lock for compartment door (available on request) Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted (SOR-C.Overall dimensions Tmax T5 (400 A) Draw out circuit breaker Caption isolating distance [mm/in] Fixing on sheet 1 2 Fixed part Moving part with terminal covers.

5 1.63 D 172.[mm/in] Flange for compartment door Drilling templates of the compartment door 1SDC210590F0023 Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals 3 POLES 1SDC210592F0023 4 POLES For rear terminals 1SDC210594F0023 1SDC210593F0023 1SDC210595F0023 1SDC210591F0023 6 3 POLES 4 POLES A B 128.5 2.5 6.5 5.54 Rear 400 A 32.28 ABB 6/33 .79 E 64.06 C 143 5.

FC Cu/Al 1SDC210600F0023 1SDC210597F0023 6 6/34 1SDC210601F0023 ABB .EF [mm/in] 1SDC210596F0023 Caption 1 2 3 Front terminals for copper cables Front terminals for copper/ aluminium cables Terminals with degree of protection IP40 Front for cables Cu and Cu/Al 400 A.Overall dimensions Tmax T5 (400 A) Terminals Extended front .FC Cu .

HR 1SDC210610F0023 1SDC210606F0023 1SDC210609F0023 [mm/in] 6/35 6 .VR 1SDC210607F0023 1SDC210608F0023 1SDC210605F0023 Rear flat horizontal .ABB Rear flat vertical .

40 47 1.22 1SDC210620F0023 M5/Ø 5.33 109.38 Ø 0.08 1 268 10.F Front extended .26 Caption 1 2 Flange for compartment door Tightening torque 2 Nm Template for drilling sheet metal support (minimum thickness of sheet metal: 0.5 Ø 0.RC Front .75 85.51 1SDC210621F0023 171.5 4.13 35 1.33 8 0.33 109.32 111.12 (4 POLES) (3 POLES) [mm/in] Terminal covers (to be ordered when not included in the supply) 107 4.53 = = Y = = X 112 4.79 = = 115 4.76 105 4.5 11 104.55 9 0.25 4.85 35 1.76 140 5.76 237 9.31 M5/Ø 5.75 4.34 241 9.22 R21.32 X 109.5 Ø 0.21 101.75 4.76 70 70 2.47 111.49 237 9.76 2.49 105 4.75 4.28 Y 6/36 ABB 1SDC210622F0023 301 11.51 3 POLES (3 POLES) (4 POLES) Y 4 POLES Y 70 70 70 2.27 140 = 5.12”/3 mm) For terminals: For rear Cu/Al cables terminals .58 70 2.76 2.13 X X = 16.75 4.5 Ø 0.32 .75 4.41 142 5.10 high 2 X 237 9.5 4 2 0.07 159 6.38 Y 6 241.5 0.75 4.5 R0.5 0.FC CuAl Y Y 70 2.38 (3 POLES) (4 POLES) Template for drilling compartment door and fitting flange (thickness of sheet metal: 0.5 Ø 1.22 109.59 X 1SDC210623F0023 = = Ø7 Ø 0.75 5.51 (3 POLES) (4 POLES) For rear threaded terminals .35 103.R 70 2.51 = ≥3 ≥0.38 111.76 140 5.40 241 9.93 = 161 6.85 237 9.75 4.49 Ø 35 Ø 1.65 = 1SDC210618F0023 152 = 5.31 M5/Ø 5.08”/2 mm) Y 147 5.40 241 9.38 1SDC210619F0023 12 0.5 9.75 4.85 210 8.98 Mounting on Y sheet metal 14 0.75 3.38 35 1.5 6.Overall dimensions Isomax S6 Fixed circuit breaker Y 279.33 X Y Y X X M5/Ø 5.12 low 2.76 2.32 141.22 8 Ø 35 0.EF Front for Cu/Al cables .55 125.

54 116 Y 4.1 0.5 0.75 0.04 12 0.57 1.98 Ø 20 Ø 0.79 16.89 116 45 4.5 2.R (low terminal covers included in the supply) 49.87 44 1.FCCuAl (IP20 high terminal covers included in the supply) 59 2.91 Threaded rear .5 Ø 0.5 0.64 23 0.5 ± 0.76 2.5 8 20 Ø 13 1.77 22.57 90 3.79 Ø 0.76 2. 1SDC210625F0023 1SDC210627F0023 1SDC210624F0023 53.31 20 0.F 40 1.32 42 1.EF 41.55 67 2.FCCuAl (IP20 high terminal covers included in the supply) For rear Cu/Al cables .69 12 0.76 2.57 22.95 0.79 Ø 6.57 22.85 Front extended spread .Terminals Front extended .66 Ø 17.89 23 0.77 4.65 25 0.5 4.31 0.47 1SDC210628F0023 6 ABB 6/37 .11 47 1.5 1.ES 45 116 1.89 ± 0.51 116.10 73 2.63 8 0.5 0.73 M24x2 Front for Cu/Al cables .5 Ø 0.26 [mm/in] Front .59 1SDC210626F0023 70 70 70 2.91 5 min.47 50 1.97 Ø 14 Ø 0.

76 (4 POLES) (3 POLES) 3 140 5.5 7.37 Lock for compartment door (to order) Tightening torque 9 Nm = X Ø 5.5 3.72 96 3.5 1.5 5.24 295 11.5 3.69 80.5 3.5 3.17 Ø7 Ø 0.43 284 11.98 162.34 177 6.51 210 8.76 2.62 131 5.76 77.78 0.57 58 145 2.35 45.12”/3 mm) Y 140 5.05 ABB .75 Ø 0.26 9 39 1.5 1.28 5.70 X 6 (3 POLES) (4 POLES) 1SDC210630F0023 107 4.5 3.16 Y 170 6.28 90 3.08”/2 mm) Ø4 Ø 0.63 101 3.22 14.08 isolating distance 4 2 1 280 11.98 196 7.41 Ø 8.77 Nr.54 == R2 R0.48 195.78 123.5 Ø 0.71 89.87 77.5 4.27 70 2.28 16 0.97 = 1SDC210629F0023 167 6.40 121 4.76 2.75 5.76 R min 200 7.57 190 7.27 70 70 70 2.52 208 8.08 45 1.18 (4 POLES) Y Y 6/38 1SDC210631F0023 Ø7 19.16 136.86 193.33 120 4.54 0.51 273 152 10.08 Y Template for drilling sheet metal support (minimum thickness of sheet metal: 0.5 2.21 214 8.5 6.02 210 8.72 X X X 161 6.05 (3 POLES) (4 POLES (4 POLES) Template for drilling compartment door and fitting flange (thickness of sheet metal: 0.5 0.5 (M8) Ø 0.31 = 57.Overall dimensions Isomax S6 Draw out circuit breaker Y [mm/in] Caption 1 2 3 4 5 Fixed part Moving part 27.79 86.19 133 5.5 7.61 Flange for compartment door X = 5 2 0. 5 Ø 8 Ø 0.

HR 80.79 158 6.22 Ø 14 Ø 0.79 3 0.F 70 2.5 3.12 Ø 14 Ø 0.76 70 2.57 [mm/in] 31 1.55 70 2.55 X X 40 1.57 X X 1SDC210633F0023 10 0.39 X X X X Horizontal or vertical rear flat bar for S6 .12 20 0.39 1SDC210632F0023 6 ABB 6/39 .76 3 0.22 10 0.76 40 1.17 20 0.Terminals Front for S6 .

Overall dimensions
Isomax S7

Fixed circuit breaker
Caption
Y

[mm/in]

Terminal covers
(4 POLES) (3 POLES) =

1 2

Flange for compartment door Tightening torque 2 Nm
7 0.28 70 2.76

280 11.02
=

37 1.46

217 8.54

1
177 6.97

406 15.98

=

=

326 12.83

161 6.34

X

X

105 4.13

X

7 0.28

37 1.46

=

=

140 5.51

Y

2 0.08

Template for drilling sheet metal support
(Minimum thickness of sheet metal: 0.12”/3 mm) For flat rear terminals - R For terminals: Front - F Front extended - EF Front for Cu/Al cables - FC CuAl
Y 70 2.76
(3 POLES)

Template for drilling compartment door and fitting flange
(thickness of sheet metal: 0.08”/2 mm)
Y

3 POLES

4 POLES

1SDC210634F0023

3 0.12

138.5 5.45 140.5 5.53 146.5 5.77 214.5 8.44

147 = 5.79 = 115 4.53
= =

140 5.51

(4 POLES)

Y
220 8.66 Ø 3.6 H12 Ø 0.14 203 7.99 315 12.40 171.5 6.75

Y
112 4.41

X

142 5.59
=

290 11.42

=

=

Ø 3.6 H12 Ø 0.14

X

203 7.99

=

203 7.99 315 12.40

171.5 6.75

X

X

X

= =

R40 R1.57

70 70 2.76 2.76

R40 R1.57

140 5.51 70 70 70 2.76 2.76 2.76

X

Ø7 Ø 0.28
1SDC210637F0023

Y

1SDC210636F0023

6
Y

M5/Ø 5.5 Ø 0.22 Ø 5.5 - M5 Ø 0.22

Y

Ø 5.5 - M5 Ø 0.22

35 1.38

Y

6/40

ABB

1SDC210638F0023

50 1.97 80 3.15

378 14.88

378 14.88

378 14.88

50 1.97 80 3.15

70 2.76

1SDC210635F0023

30.5 1.20

70 2.76

210 8.27 152 5.98

low
2
7 0.28

70 2.76

Terminals
Front - F
10 10 10 140 0.39 0.39 0.39 5.51 50 33.5 1.97 Ø 11 1.32 22 Ø 0.43 0.87

[mm/in] Front extended - EF
Y
70 2.76 22 0.87 70 2.76

Y

Ø 11 Ø 0.43

1SDC210639F0023

Front for Cu/Al cables for S7 1250 - FC CuAl
97 3.82 78 3.07 57 2.24 Ø 21.4 Ø 0.84

Front extended spreaded - ES
45 1.77 116 4.57 116 Y 4.57 22.5 0.89 90 23 3.54 0.91 116 45 4.57 1.77 22.5 0.89 Ø 13 Ø 0.51 107 4.21
1SDC210641F0023

70 2.76

Y 70 70 2.76 2.76

50 1.97

15 0.59

38 1.50 37 1.46

30.5 1.20

Raer horizontal or vertical flat terminals - HR or VR
Y

16 0.63

70 2.76

70 2.76

70 2.76

85 3.35

A
171.5 6.75

X

315 12.40

X

50 1.97

B
22 0.87
1SDC210643F0023

1SDC210642F0023

1SDC210640F0023

22 0.87 22 0.87

71 2.80 107 4.21

22 0.87

70 2.76 50 1.97

39 1.54

15 0.59

Ø 11 Ø 0.43 14 0.55

6

22 0.87

ABB

6/41

Overall dimensions
Isomax S7

Draw out circuit breaker
Y

[mm/in]

Caption 1 2 3 4 5 Fixed part Moving part Flange for compartment door Lock for compartment door (to be ordered)
140 5.51 2 0.08 241.5 9.51 3 0.12

280 11.02 210 8.27 140 5.51

(4 POLES) (3 POLES)

2

1
211.25 8.32

4
143.25 5.64

3

270 10.63

406 15.98

X

160 6.30

8.25 0.32
=

max

196 7.72 96 3.78 123.5 4.86 193.5 7.62 131 5.16 136.5 5.37

Tightening torque 9 Nm

=

X

5
Ø 5.5 Ø 0.22

27.5 1.08

isolating stroke

Y

Template for drilling sheet metal support or channel
(Minimum thickness of sheet metal: 0.12”/3 mm)
Y
140 5.51 210 8.27 70 2.76
(3 POLES) (4 POLES)

Template for drilling compartment door and fitting flange
(thickness of sheet metal: 0.08”/2 mm)
Ø4 Ø 0.16

Y 170 6.69 80.5 3.17
Ø7 Ø 0.28 90 3.54
==

120.5 4.74

45 1.77

Nr.5 Ø 8 Ø 0.31 9 39 1.54 0.35 177 6.97
=

92.5 3.64

68.25 2.69

X
120 4.72

161 6.34

X

X
76 2.99

Ø 8.5 (M8) Ø 0.33

X
19.75 0.78 101 3.98 162.5 6.40 121 4.76 R min. 200 7.87

=

(3 POLES) (4 POLES)

Y

6/42

1SDC210645F0023

214 8.43 284 11.18

107 4.21

Y

1SDC210646F0023

6

120.5 4.74

16 0.63

Ø7 Ø 0.28

1SDC210644F0023

218.5 8.60 247 9.72

ABB

Terminals
Front - F
31 1.22 16 0.63 70 2.76 3 0.12 Ø 11 Ø 0.43 67 2.64 70 2.76

[mm/in]
Y
70 2.76 50 1.97 22 0.87

22 0.87

14 0.55

X

X

Rear horizontal or vertical flat terminals - HR or VR
108 4.25 3 0.12 Ø 11 Ø 0.43 22 0.87 50 1.97

Y

X

22 0.87

14 0.55

143.25 5.64

1SDC210647F0023

X
16 0.63

70 2.76

70 2.76

70 2.76

1SDC210648F0023

6

ABB

6/43

Overall dimensions
Isomax S8

Fixed circuit breaker
Caption 1 2 3 Flange for compartment door Circuit breaker mounting holes
400 15.75
=

[mm/in]
380 14.96
Y
=

2
20 0.79

556 21.89
Y

2
20 0.79

242 9.53

2.5 0.10

1

3

Internal side of compartment door

313 12.32

280 11.02 400 15.75

280 11.02

X

X

X

X

X

X

20 0.79

15 0.59

120 4.72

120 4.72

150 5.91
=

120 4.72

406 15.98
Y
3 POLES

=

286.5 11.28

Y
4 POLES

Caption 1 2 Hole for rear terminals only Minimum radius of rotation of compartment door

Template for drilling sheet metal support
(Minimum thickness of sheet metal: 0.12”/3 mm)

Template for drilling compartment door and fitting flange
(Minimum thickness of sheet metal: < 0.10”/2.5 mm)

356 14.02 178 7.01 20 0.79
R R0 10 .3 9 R R0 10 .3 9

506 19.92 178 7.01 161 6.34 20 0.79 R. min. 300 11.81 135 5.31
R 4

161 6.34

309 12.17

309 12.17

280 11.02

280 11.02

327 12.87

161 6.34

Nr. 8 Ø 9 Ø 0.35

190 7.48 380 14.96

Nr. 8 Ø 9 Ø 0.35 530 20.87

190 7.48

Ø5 Ø 0.20

341 13.43

3 POLES

4 POLES

Terminals
Front - F Rear - R
120 4.72 115 4.53 85 3.35

[mm/in]

20 0.79

20 0.79

=

20 0.79

20 0.79

80 3.15

40
= 1.57

80 3.15

20 0.79

324 12.76

40
= 1.57 =

40 1.57

6

Y

65 2.56

Y

324 12.76

=

65 2.56

40 1.57

40 1.57

Ø 15 Ø 0.59

80 3.15
= Ø 15

150 5.91

120 120 4.72 Y 4.72

150 5.91

120 120 4.72 Y 4.72

20 0.79

6/44

ABB

1SDC210651F0023

Ø 0.59 20 0.79 40 1.57 15 0.59

20 0.79

1SDC210650F0023

0 R1 .39 R0

161 6.34

0 R1 .39 R0

20 0.79

20 0.79

344 13.54

1SDC210649F0023

120 4.72 203 7.99

20 0.79

236.5 9.31

R 0.

16

74 ABB 1SDC210166F0003 6/45 . fixing on sheet 2 3 4 5 T2 T3 1SDC210165F0003 6 222 8.74 222 8.Overall dimensions T1.RC221/RC222 [mm/in] Caption 1 Depth of the switchboard with circuit breaker face extending Depth of the switchboard with circuit breaker face flush with door Front terminals for cable connection Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Insulating plate 1SDC210164F0003 T1 Front .F. T2 and T3 with residual current release .

5 2.38 F 53.5 5.21 107 4.57 1SDC210655F0023 ABB .88 141.80 C 53. T2 and T3 with residual current release .66 T1 T2 T3 6/46 124 4.5 2.98 30 1.88 124 4.1 3.04 E 25 0.RC221/RC222 [mm/in] Flange for the compartment door T1 3 POLES T2 T3 4 POLES Drilling template for fixing sheet T1 .1 2.11 61 2.5 4.07 90 3.11 53.T3 3 POLES 4 POLES 6 A B 107 4.18 35 1.36 67.5 2.40 D 78.21 122 4.Overall dimensions T1.T2 .09 60 2.54 102.

1 1.39 C 94.93 19 0.17 118.T2 .T3 A H H T2 .1 3.99 83.67 D – – 76 2.02 G 78.5 0.54 46 1.75 F 113 4.29 E 23.81 53.2 4.72 127.T3 T1 .[mm/in] Drilling templates of the compartment door Without flange face extending 3 POLES T1 .5 2.5 4.5 0.T2 .53 6 ABB 6/47 .71 13.T3 T1 .T2 .07 90 3.26 122 4.04 H 39.93 23.5 0.T3 A B 108.71 18 0.1 3.11 1SDC210656F0023 T1 T2 T3 18 0.T3 4 POLES T1 .T2 .4 5.T2 .80 137 5.54 102.5 3.45 120 4.5 4.T3 B A Without flange face not extending With flange face not extending T1 B T1 .70 106 4.

RC221/RC222 Fixed version Front .Overall dimensions T4 and T5 with residual current release .F. fixing on sheet T4 T5 (400 A) [mm/in] 1SDC210657F0023 1SDC210658F0023 1SDC210659F0023 Caption 1 Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted (only 3Q 1SY) Flange for the compartment door Drilling templates of compartment door and fitting flange 1SDC210661F0023 1SDC210662F0023 1SDC210663F0023 For circuit breakers For residual current release With flange Without flange Drilling templates for support sheet T4 T5 6 1SDC210665F0023 6/48 1SDC210666F0023 ABB 1SDC210664F0023 1SDC210660F0023 .

fixing on sheet T4 T5 (400 A) [mm/in] 1SDC210667F0023 1SDC210669F0023 Caption 1 2 3 Fixed part Mobile part Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted (only 3Q 1SY) Flange for the compartment door 1SDC210668F0023 Drilling templates of compartment door and fitting flange 1SDC210671F0023 With flange 1SDC210673F0023 Without flange 1SDC210674F0023 For circuit breakers For residual current release 1SDC210672F0023 1SDC210670F0023 Drilling templates for support sheet T4 T5 6 1SDC210675F0023 ABB 1SDC210676F0023 6/49 .Plug-in version Front .F.

T3 [mm/in] Solenoid operator superimposed T1 T2 1SDC210677F0023 1SDC210678F0023 Caption 1 Depth of the switchboard with operating mechanism face extending Depth of the switchboard with operating mechanism face flush with door Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40 Insulating plate T3 2 3 4 1SDC210680F0023 Flange for compartment door Drilling templates of the compartment door 1SDC210682F0023 6 A B 18 0.5 0.71 18 0.5 0.53 1SDC210681F0023 1SDC210679F0023 C 23.5 1.32 33.14 Without flange Operating mechanism face extending Without flange Operating mechanism face flush with door With flange Operating mechanism face flush with door 1SDC210683F0023 ABB .5 1.32 29 1.75 T1 T2 T3 6/50 33.71 13.5 0.T2 .Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T1 .93 19 0.93 23.

52 Caption 1 2 Transmission unit Rotary handle operating mechanism on the compartment door Insulating plate A B 14 0.01 with 3 T1-T2 T3 28 1.37 60.10 32.55 1SDC210686F0023 with 7.5 1.[mm/in] Rotary handle operating mechanism on the compartment door 1SDC210684F0023 Heights for door with maximum distance 470.5 2.5 0.28 9.5 18.38 with with Heights for door with minimum distance Drilling template of the compartment door 1SDC210685F0023 1SDC210687F0023 6 Minimum rotation radius for door fulcrum ABB 6/51 .

7 2.2 2.T3 [mm/in] Rotary handle operating mechanism on circuit breaker Caption 1 Rotary handle operating mechanism on circuit breaker Insulating plate 2 A B 28 1.67 63.5 1.2 2.5 2.7 1.10 32.09 48.49 60.38 56 2.T2 .28 C 53.20 Drilling template of the compartment door Drilling: see detail “A” Flange for the compartment 6 1SDC210692F0023 6/52 1SDC210690F0023 1SDC210691F0023 1SDC210689F0023 ABB .Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T1 .92 D 1SDC210688F0023 T1-T2 T3 67.

5 1.25 C 112.01 Caption 1 2 3 Drilling templates of the compartment door 1SDC210694F0023 307 12.5 2.5 2.22 F 53.5 2.25 E 53.5 3.5 1SDC210695F0023 1SDC210693F0023 1SDC210696F0023 6 1SDC210698F0023 A B 77.11 56.15 82.09 Drilling templates for support sheet Insulating plate Front interlocking plate among three circuit breakers 470 18.[mm/in] Mechanical interlock between circuit breakers Front interlocking plate between two circuit breakers 305 12.5 2.5 3.58 472 18.5 4.97 47.63 D 87.35 82.5 3.11 65.43 115 4.5 4.5 3.07 50 1.11 53.52 T1 T2 T3 52.5 2.87 ABB 1SDC210697F0023 6/53 .11 53.53 117.5 2.05 80 3.44 85 3.5 2.

81 0 R 3 .T3 [mm/in] Caption 1 2 3 Interlocking mechanism Circuit breakers coupling plate Drilling template for all terminal versions 99.98 = 2 R 88 3.5 2. 28 190 7.7 7 Ø 0.46 1 540 = 21.75 68.46 .98 190 = 7.5 Z = 25 0.2 88 3.46 56 2.46 56 2.23 = 540 = 21.56 Caption 1 2 3 Interlocking mechanism Mechanical rear vertical interlock between two T3 circuit breakers = 228 8.56 Ø Ø 7 0.48 = Z = = Circuit breakers coupling plate Drilling template for all terminal versions = = = 65 2.Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T1 .2 88 3.26 28 =1.T2 .26 = K K K K 6 88 3.91 Mechanical rear horizontal interlock between two T3 circuit breakers 440 17.99 300 11.81 300 11.5 330 12.18 R1 3 1 65 2.46 R 3 1.28 400 15.46 56 2.5 165 6.25 5.48 165 6. 0 18 3 K K 590 = 23.1 = = Z Z The mechanical rear vertical interlock for Tmax T3 is not compatible with the RC221 and RC222 residual current releases 6/54 ABB 1SDC210961F0004 = = 1SDC210L94F0001 88 3.25 3.32 400 15.28 Ø 2 165 6.2 88 3.75 134.

Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T4 . “A” 1SDC210702F0023 Det.T5 Fixed version Caption 1 2 3 Transmission unit Rotary handle assembly with door lock device Padlock device for open position (maximum 3 padlocks to be provided by the user) 1SDC210699F0023 [mm/in] Rotary handle operating mechanism on the compartment door 4 5 IP54 protection (supplied on request) Min…max distance from the front of the door without accessory 4 Min…max distance from the front of the door with accessory 4 Dimension with AUE connector (early making contact) 6 Drilling of compartment door 7 1SDC210701F0023 Minimum rotation radius for door fulcrum Caption 1 2 Rotary handle operating mechanism on circuit breaker Padlock device for open position (maximum 3 padlocks to be provided by the user) Dimension with AUE connector (early making contact) Compartment door lock Rotary handle operating mechanism on circuit breaker Det. “A” 1SDC210705F0023 1SDC210703F0023 1SDC210704F0023 3 4 1SDC210700F0023 Drilling template of the compartment door Flange for the compartment door 6 1SDC210706F0023 ABB 1SDC210707F0023 1SDC210708F0023 6/55 .

Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T4 .T5 [mm/in] Caption 1 Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted (only 3Q 1SY) Motor operator T4 T5 1SDC210709F0023 1SDC210710F0023 Flange for the compartment door (supplied as standard) Drilling template of the compartment door 1SDC210712F0023 1SDC210713F0023 With flange Without flange Drilling template for support sheet T4 T5 1SDC210715F0023 1SDC210716F0023 1SDC210717F0023 3 POLES 4 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES 6/56 ABB 1SDC210718F0023 6 1SDC210714F0023 1SDC210711F0023 .

83 B 70 2.5 1. “A” 1SDC210719F0023 1SDC210720F0023 Flange for the compartment door (supplied as standard) Drilling template for the compartment door For drilling see detail “A” Det. “A” 1SDC210721F0023 1SDC210722F0023 With flange 1SDC210723F0023 Without flange Drilling template for support sheet 1SDC210724F0023 1SDC210725F0023 6 A T4 T5 35 1.Fixed version Caption 1 2 Front for lever operating mechanism Lock for the compartment door (supplied on request) [mm/in] Front for lever operating mechanism T4 T5 Det.38 46.5 0.69 23.66 C 17.76 93 3.25 0.92 3 POLES 1SDC210726F0023 4 POLES ABB 1SDC210727F0023 6/57 .

T5 [mm/in] Caption 1 2 Interlocking mechanism Circuit breaker coupling plate Interlock between two circuit breakers placed side by side Caption 1 Drilling template for all versions with rear terminals Drilling templates for fixing the circuit breaker on the support sheet 1SDC210729F0023 1SDC210728F0023 6 6/58 1SDC210730F0023 ABB .Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T4 .

Fixed version Interlock between two circuit breakers placed side by side [mm/in] 1SDC210731F0023 A B 1SDC210732F0023 C 1SDC210734F0023 D E 1SDC210735F0023 F Type Circuit breakers N° 1 T4 (F-P-W) N° 1 T4 (F-P-W) N° 1 T4 (F-P-W) N° 1 T5/400 (F-P-W) or T5/600* (F) N° 1 T4 (F-P-W) N° 1 T5/600* (P-W) N° 1 T5/400 (F-P-W) or T5/600* (F) N° 1 T5/400 (F-P-W) or T5/600* (F) N° 1 T5/400 (F-P-W) or T5/600* (F) N° 1 T5/600* (P-W) N° 1 T5/600* (P-W) N° 1 T5/600* (P-W) A B C D E F Note: (F) Fixed circuit breaker (P) Plug-in circuit breaker (W) Draw out circuit breaker * Please ask ABB for 600 A availability 1SDC210736F0023 1SDC210733F0023 6 ABB 6/59 .

Overall dimensions Accessories for Tmax T4 .T5 Draw out version Motor operator T4 T5 (400 A) [mm/in] isolating distance 1SDC210738F0023 Flange for the compartment door (supplied as standard) 1SDC210737F0023 Drilling templates for the compartment door and fitting flange 1SDC210741F0023 6 6/60 1SDC210742F0023 ABB 1SDC210739F0023 .

Overall dimensions Accessories for Isomax S6 Draw out version Caption 1 Padlock device for open position (maximum 3 padlocks to be provided by the user) Lock for compartment door (supplied on request) Dimension with AUE connector (early making contact) [mm/in] Rotary handle operating mechanism on the circuit breakers isolating distance 2 3 Det. “A” 1SDC210743F0023 Flange for the compartment door Drilling template for compartment door and fitting flange For drilling see detail “A” 1SDC210743F0023 1SDC210744F0023 Det. “A” 1SDC210746F0023 1SDC210747F0023 1SDC210745F0023 6 ABB 6/61 .

18 Ø Ø9 0.07 1 295 11.76 70 2.19 130 5.76 70 2.56 103.09 390 15.12 200 7. 35 1 65 2.2 R 104 4.08 Caption 1 2 3 Interlocking mechanism Circuit breaker coupling plate Drilling template for all versions of terminals 6 6/62 1SDC210L95F0001 ABB 1SDC210L96F0001 .35 360 14.76 70 2.5 insulation distance +1.09 335 13.Overall dimensions Accessories for Isomax S6 [mm/in] Mechanical interlock 673 26.5 120 4.61 +27.76 70 2.72 70 2.76 2 5 R 0.76 70 2.5 4.87 3 538 21.17 104 4.

min.60 222.5 0.85 67 2. min.31 Y 19.25±0.84 R8 R0.73 22.5 3.57 338 13.1 R.5 0.5 3.90 23.5 4.75 0.75 0.76 1 81.90 174 6.63 338 13.31 319 12.25±0.76 2 0.03 111.87 3 Y Y Caption 1 2 3 Flange for compartment door Template for drilling compartment door Dimensions with connectors Note See the various different versions for the dimensions of the circuit breakers Motor operator for draw out circuit breakers Y 27.80±0.64 2 1SDC210750F0023 140 = 5. 200 4.56 159.5 11.34 270 10.5 6.63 192.5 8.97 R X 117.24 = 96. min.5 1.004 Ø8 Ø 0.004 Ø8 Ø 0.97 102.25 7.25 4.5 8.80±0.81 23.004 R.25 4.48 285.93 2 0.08 247. 200 4.004 R.5 7.78 81.96 108 4.87 2 6 .25 2.25 72. min.5 6.51 Y Y Caption 1 2 Flange for compartment door Template for drilling compartment door Note See the various different versions for the dimensions of the circuit breakers ABB 6/63 1SDC210751F0023 174 6.20±0.31 304 11.1 R.5 9.93 304 11.56 X X 22.1 3.85 122±0.5 7.08 198.5 3.28 319 12.28 X 72.1 3.1 3.25±0.31 Y 19.75 3.25 2.75 4.75 0.51 215.25±0.93 1 81.63 100. 7.40 94.75 0.84 304 159.004 186.60 222.20±0.31 125.20±0.[mm/in] Motor operator for fixed circuit breaker Y 91.004 270 10.80 122±0.20±0.5 8.1 3.08 isolating distance 91.5 3.78 81.74 = 140 = 5. 7.

38 Caption 1 2 3 Transmission assembly Rotary handle assembly with door lock device Padlock device (maximum 3 padlocks max ø 0.72 177 6..51 104.33 104 4.75 0.31 M5/Ø 5.17 8 0.Overall dimensions Accessories for Isomax S6 [mm/in] Caption 1 2 3 4 5 Rotary handle operating mechanism on circuit breaker Lock for compartment door (to order) Drilling of compartment door 140 5.30 = 4 5 6 7 Minimum radius of rotation for fulcrum of door Drilling template for mounting circuit breaker on sheet metal 2. min.87 241 9.31 M5/Ø 5.49 241 9.87 6 Drilling only required for version with rear terminals Note See the various different versions for the dimensions of the circuit breakers 3 POLES 4 POLES Y 70 70 70 2.22 Y Ø 35 Ø 1.5 Y 1.77 2.5 22 0.48 19 0.24”/6 mm to be provided by customer only for circuit breaker open position) Compartment door-mounted rotary handle mechanism with adjustable depth for fixed circuit breaker Y 105 4.76 70 70 2.22 2 103.22 Ø 35 Ø 1.54 115 4.09 70 2.24 106 4.83”…19.38 106 4.11 90 3.49 Flange for compartment door Tightening torque 2 Nm Note See the various different versions for the dimensions of the circuit breakers Ø7 Ø 28 42.97 147 5.22 Y Ø 35 Ø 1.17 237 9.81 = 105 4. 200 R.87 Y 4 R min 200 R min 7.09 237 9.76 133 5.13 35 1.07 2 44.07 6 23 0.5 4.38 133 5.24 241 9.31 M5/Ø 5.76 2.42 1.63 5 0.53 147 5.. min.13 36 28 1.76 133 5.5 4.54 103.33 104 4.16”/-4 mm (shaft length) 3 7 168 6.49 105 4.5 Ø 0.13 41.09 237 9.24 133 5.67 Drilling only required for version with rear terminals 3 POLES 4 POLES 70 70 70 2.76 2.79 Rotary handle operating mechanism on fixed circuit breaker 152 5.5 31 1.98 140 5.08 1.51 196 7.08 27 1.92”/72.10 33 1.76 106 4.75 22 0.76 70 70 2.17 237 9.76 106 4.5 Ø 0.09 70 2.87 37 1.31 M5/Ø 5.75 5.06 54 2.76 2. 96) Distance 6 -0.5 Ø 0.76 2.61 2 0.506 mm (with IP54 protection min.49 105 4.75 0.33 104 4.20 46 1.46 Ø4 Ø 16 45 1.38 8 0.79 R.33 104 4.63 1.87 5 41.5 1.91 1 63 2.24 X 241 9.22 Ø 35 Ø 1.13 35 1.76 2.38 6/64 1SDC210752F0023 X ABB .17 X 1SDC210753F0023 8 0.5 Ø 0. 7.13 R min 200 R min 7.38 8 0.10 X 28 1.76 2.

ø 0.98 X 105 4.31 M5/Ø 5.53 = Note See the various different versions for the dimensions of the circuit breakers Y 3 POLES 3 1 42.09 = X 8 0.31 M5/Ø 5.35 39 1.31 = 6.03 49 1.5 6.16 2 45 1.43 ABB 6/65 1SDC210755F0023 1 25 0.76 R.5 1.87 Ø4 Ø 0.77 90 3.5 8.24 X X 115 4.75 4.76 Y 131 5.27 2 44.75 0.77 90 3.98 162. min.5 4.75 22 0.08 1.5 3.28 115 = 4.5 Ø 0.95 40 1.72 177 X Note See the various different versions for the dimensions of the circuit breakers 3 1 37 1.53 52.53 Line In .79 Flange for compartment door Tightening torque 2 Nm = = = = 2.40 121 4.16 136.38 241 9.76 2.94 Rotary handle operating mechanism on draw out circuit breaker Y 210 8.5 Ø 0.54 19.5 1.79 = Y Drilling only required for version with rear terminals 106 4.69 80. 200 R.28 77 3.Overall dimensions Accessories for Isomax S7 [mm/in] Caption 1 2 3 Rotary handle on circuit breaker Lock for compartment door (to order) Padlock device for open position (maximum 3 padlocks max. 7.39 25 0.60 123.46 91.33 External neutral 75 2.38 11 0.51 104.87 Y 196 7.78 101 3. min.5 5.17 104 4.13 35 1.76 2.11 X = = Ø7 Ø 0.22 = Y Ø 35 Ø 1.22 4 POLES 1SDC210754F0023 Y = 6 70 70 70 2.5 3.17 Load 237 9. 5 Ø 8 Ø 0.76 Ø 35 Ø 1.5 4.76 70 70 2.75 0.09 70 2.37 42.98 140 5.67 147 = 5.49 = X 4 5 6 115 4.24 104 4.98 8 0.49 237 9.76 = 5 6 185 7.24”/6 mm to be provided by user) 151 5.51 X 177 6.54 196 7.07 37 1.97 = X X 9 0.5 2.93 100 A 160 A 200 A 250 A 320 A 400 A 106 4.5 0.12 = = 4 5 103.57 = 133 5.76 2.07 10 0.46 2 0.34 Y 170 6.33 133 5.16 2 Y = 45 1.08 Ø4 Ø 0.54 161 6.38 241 9.17 == Nr.97 147 5.67 Caption 1 2 3 4 5 Front flange for operating lever mechanism Lock for compartment door (to order) Drilling of compartment door Front flange for operating lever mechanism Y 152 5.86 222.72 = 140 5.

35 6 70 70 406 15.76 2.18 300 11.5 0.06 X 994 39.Overall dimensions Accessories for Isomax S7 [mm/in] Caption 1 2 3 4 5 Interlock device Drilling template for mounting circuit breaker on sheet metal Drilling template for all versions with rear terminals 406 15.35 Note See the various different versions for the dimensions of the circuit breakers 65 2.5 0.53 = R0 .54 Tightening torque 9 Nm = = 115 4.40 = = 7 0.28 6.57 2 336 13.5 5.61 Dimensions with draw out version mounted on right Tightening torque 9 Nm R 20 = = 115 4.76 2.7 9 X Ø9 Ø 0.28 Note See the various different versions for the dimensions of the circuit breakers = R30 R1.72 420 16.28 = = 290 11.53 = 1 1SDC210756F0023 X 7 0.98 = = 2 4 Y 3 = 2.98 = Y 315 12.26 5 1 5.76 4.98 450 17.28 Caption 1 2 3 4 Interlock device Drilling template for mounting circuit breaker on sheet metal Drilling template for all versions with rear terminals 1100 43.08 ABB .26 X 407 16.53 = = isolating distance 27.42= = 875 34.28 27.81 6.08 Y Y 7 0.72 2.81 Y 30 1.28 300 11.76 2.45 408 16.02 = 117 4.76 2.76 2.76 2.5 1.56 336 13.18 = = Ø9 Ø 0.31 = 406 15.98 70 70 70 120 70 70 70 = 2.76 = 7 0.65 = 40 1.23 Y 3 140.53 115 4.13 = 166 6.56 7 0.76 = 340 13.5 0.23 isolating distance Y 6/66 1SDC210757F0023 70 7 0.22 4 40 1.54 Interlock between two horizontally-installed circuit breakers Y 660 25.57 = 550 21.5 1.39 65 2.

004 23. 200 7.78 81.90 174 6. 200 7.48 285.56 X 22.004 R.11 23.1 4.87 2 2 1SDC210759F0023 122±0.5 3.5 6.84 270 10.51 = 1 81.31 319 12.25±0.25 3.89 91.60 140 = 5. min.76 91.5 8.31 Y 19.28 222.75 7.49 159.54 338 13.31 304 11.20±0.24 91 3.25 2.80±0.5 9.25 8.5 0.60 140 = 5.20±0.78 81.08 isolating distance 7 0.56 X 97 3.25±0.58 174 6.28 1 231.004 Nr.1 4.93 81.26 98.87 Y 6 Y Caption 1 2 Flange for compartment door Template for drilling compartment door Note See the various different versions for the dimensions of the circuit breakers ABB 6/67 .25±0.75 0.1 3.76 91.85 1SDC210758F0023 215.93 2 0.25 2.75 0.5 8.71 217 8.5 3.20±0.28 108.75 0.1 3.28 R8 R0.82 22.08 295.63 R.1 3.75 0.48 270 10.004 211.5 0.5 4.5 6.59 X R8 R0.31 304 11.63 338 13. 7 Ø 8 Ø 0.25±0.5 1.004 195.84 104.32 190 7.31 Y 19.97 72.80±0.11 X 114 4.[mm/in] Motor operator for fixed circuit breaker Y 222.51 = 2 0.1 3.25 4. 7 Ø 8 Ø 0.90 3 Y Y Caption 1 2 3 Flange for compartment door Template for drilling compartment doorl Dimensions with connectors Note See the various different versions for the dimensions of the circuit breakers Motor operator for draw out circuit breaker Y 27.63 159.97 72.20±0. min.75 3.08 7 0.5 8.004 Nr.5 11.31 319 12.5 11.85 122±0.

77 315 12.76 2.40 165.5 .81 = 211.38 70 70 70 2.5 .40 165.67 196 7.75 6.5 1.63 Y 5 0.91 28 1.83”…19.13 = 1SDC210760F0023 70 2.79 = = 2.13 R. 200 7.5 .87 Y Drilling only required for version with rear terminals 3 POLES 197. min.08 1.25 8. min.42 33 1.25 7. 200 7.75 0.76 70 70 2.77 315 12.57 R40 R1.25 7.. min. 96) Distance 7 (shaft lenght) .22 35 1.08 27 1.22 1 7 19 0.06 54 2.98 42.57 Ø 5.76 2.87 5 41.87 8 4 205 8.5 1.76 2.14 1SDC210761F0023 R40 R1.63 105 4.M5 Ø 0.87 Y Note See the various different versions for the dimensions of the circuit breakers Drilling only required for version with rear terminals 3 POLES 378 14.M5 Ø 0.76 140 5.76 70 70 2.25 7.97 6 4 POLES 378 14.53 Ø4 Ø 0.46 5.13 105 4.0.76 140 5.15 Ø 3.53 Y 50 1. 506 mm (with IP54 protection min.66 Y 80 3.57 6/68 220 8.40 165.57 290 11.54 177 6.92”/72 .87 105 4. 200 7.51 378 14.Overall dimensions Accessories for Isomax S7 [mm/in] Caption 1 2 3 4 5 6 Rotary handle operating mechanism on circuit breaker Lock for compartment door (to order) Drilling of compartment door Drilling template for mounting circuit breaker on sheet metal Flange for compartment door Tightening torque 2 Nm 152 5.75 0.22 Ø 3.40 165.76 2.75 6.51 X 4 5 6 X 90¥ 36 1.24”/6 mm to be provided by customer only for circuit breaker open position) Minimum radius of rotation for fulcrum of door Template for drilling compartment door Drilling template for mounting circuit breaker on sheet metal Compartment door-mounted rotary handle operating mechanism for fixed circuit breaker Y 41.75 6.10 105 4.32 2 1 406 15.51 X Rotary handle operating mechanism on fixed circuit breaker Y 2 44.30 X 3 2 0.53 = 3 147 = 5.20 46 1.76 35 1.6 H12 Ø 0.97 Note See the various different versions for the dimensions of the circuit breakers X 70 2.22 Caption 1 2 3 Transmission assembly Rotary handle assembly with door lock device Padlock device (maximum 3 padlocks max ø 0.07 6 7 8 2.97 4 4 POLES 378 14.6 H12 Ø 0.10 2 406 15.88 197.28 = 4.75 6.88 197.25 8.72 140 5.M5 Ø 0..42 Y ABB .77 90 3.77 315 12.5 1.51 = 5 6 37 140.13 140 = 5.98 23 0.15 80 3.11 115 X Ø7 Ø 0.97 X Ø 5.16 Y 211.M5 Ø 0.53 Y 50 1.48 0.75 63 22 2.76 2.14 R40 R1.76 Ø 5.97 147 5.38 70 70 70 2.22 R40 R1.53 Y 50 1.13 31 1.76 2.98 = = 45 1.5 1.25 7.88 X Ø 5.5 22 0.88 197.77 315 12.16”/4 mm R.53 Y 50 1.79 = R.32 28 1.5 .

77 == Nr.95 40 1.87 Y R40 R1.97 9 0.43 = R40 R1.75 0.16 136.67 147 = 5.16 211.5 1.5 .72 140 5.75 6. ø 0.76 2.5 .Overall dimensions Accessories for Isomax S8 [mm/in] Caption 1 2 3 Rotary handle operating mechanism on circuit breaker Lock for compartment door (to order) Padlock device for open position (maximum 3 padlocks max.69 80.5 6.5 5.98 211.5 3.24”/6 mm to be provided by user) 406 15.87 Y 170 6.57 = = X 70 2.M5 Ø 0.25 7.5 22 2 0.22 11 0.28 3 Tightening torque 2 Nm 152 5.76 R.34 196 7.17 45 1.77 315 12.25 8.38 70 70 70 2.5 5.98 162.16 Y 210 8.39 1SDC210762F0023 16 19.28 77 3.76 X Ø 5.53 Line In 25 0.53 = X 1 Ø7 Ø 0.76 91. 200 7.25 8.27 = 2 44.88 197.77 177 6.97 Drilling only required for version with rear terminals 4 External neutral 75 2.76 140 5.97 378 14.53 52.98 X 2.98 42.98 .86 Y 131 5. 7 Ø 7 Ø 0.76 70 70 2.32 Y 2 = = = = 45 1.57 ABB Y 6/69 1SDC210763F0023 = 1 25 0.57 6 Y 4 POLES 50 1.79 = Y Note See the various different versions for the dimensions of the circuit breakers 3 POLES 378 14.78 101 3.54 161 6.03 49 1.97 147 5.75 0.40 165. min.M5 Ø 0.76 2.35 X Note See the various different versions for the dimensions of the circuit breakers = = 3 1 222.5 4.5 8.75 6.40 165.32 = Rotary handle operating mechanism on draw out circuit breaker Ø4 Ø 0.51 = Load X X X Ø 5.46 42.60 123.72 X X X 177 6.25 7.76 2.42 Ø4 Ø 0.5 2.07 10 0.51 5 = 6 140.51 Drilling template for mounting circuit breaker on sheet metal Flange for compartment door 406 15.22 115 4.77 315 12.28 = = 90 3.5 1.53 Y 50 1.11 115 = 4.67 Caption 1 2 3 4 5 6 Front flange for lever operating mechanism Lock for compartment door (to order) Drilling of compartment door Front flange for operating lever mechanism Y 105 4.37 37 1.08 1.53 = 5 6 185 7.75 0.5 3.13 = 2 0.88 197.63 0.08 140 5.40 121 4.93 100 A 160 A 200 A 250 A 320 A 400 A 4 35 1.54 196 7.79 90 3.98 4 5 6 115 4.53 36 1.

72 160 6.30 200 7.Tmax [mm/in] External neutral Ø 15 Ø 0.59 ABB .57 80 3.Overall dimensions Distances to be respected .33 122 4.87 15 0.76 110 4.15 120 4.59 70 2.80 6 6/70 1SDC210764F0023 40 1.

98 25/0.98* 25*/0.98 25/0.54 140/5.98 25/0.79 25*/0.18* For Ub ≥ 440 V: distance A ⇒ 60 mm (2.51 184/7. The dimensions to be respected must be added to the maximum dimensions of the various different versions of the circuit breakers.18* 30*/1.24 Centre distance I [mm/in] 3 poles 76/2.98 50/1.51 184/7.30 160/6.79 20/0.30 1SDC210765F0023 6 1SDC210767F0023 Note: The dimensions shown apply for operating voltage Ub up to 690 V.51 140/5.13 140/5.24 Minimum centre distance for superimposed circuit breakers Caption 1 2 3 Connection .72 140/5.51 4 poles 102/4.54 105/4. check that the connection busbars or cables do not reduce the air insulation distance Minimum centre distance for two circuit breakers side by side Circuit breaker width [mm/in] 3 poles 4 poles 102/4.13 105/4.98* T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 (*) 25/0.not insulated Insulated cable Cable terminal H [mm/in] T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 60/2.13 140/5. including the terminals.99 90/3. distance C ⇒ 45 mm (1.77 inches) Minimum centre distance between two circuit breakers side by side or superimposed For assembly side by side or superimposed.36 inches).51 160/6.Overall dimensions Distances to be respected .98 C [mm/in] 20/0.79 25/0.79 20/0.36 90/3.02 120/4.Isomax [mm/in] Insulation distances for installation in metallic cubicle A [mm/in] B [mm/in] 20/0.51 140/5.13 105/4.72 1SDC210766F0023 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 76/2.97 30*/1.51 140/5.02 120/4. ABB 6/71 .99 90/3.54 105/4.79 20/0.

79 20 0. including the terminals.87 25 0.Overall dimensions Distances to be respected .39 15 0.Isomax [mm/in] Insulation distances for installation in metal compartment with wall to chassis ground or wall to chassis ground protected with insulating plate Wall to chassis ground [mm/in] A A(*) (Ub ≤ 415 V) (Ub ≥ 440 V) B C S6 S7 S8 35 1.79 20 0.59 C 20 0.72 S6 S7 S8 35 1.79 120 4.39 10 0.98 30 1.72 (*) These distances are valid for operating voltages of > 440 V and for circuit breakers with breaking capacity level L Insulation distances for installation in insulated compartment Insulated wall [mm/in] A B 10 0. 6 6/72 ABB 1SDC210768F0023 .97 200 7.38 50 1.38 50 1.72 The dimensions shown apply for operating voltages Ub of up to 690 V.94 100 3.79 120 4.94 200 7.87 100 3.18 20 0. The dimensions to be respected must be added to the maximum dimensions of the various different versions of the circuit breakers.97 120 4.18 30 1.

02 585 23.13 (*) these are the distances to be respected for circuit breakers fitted with a flange for the compartment door or side conductor outlets.[mm/in] Minimum distance between centres for two horizontally or vertically-installed circuit breakers For horizontal or vertical installation.03 I [mm/in] 3 poles 210 8.27 435 17. Minimum distance between centres for vertically-installed circuit breakers H [mm/in] S6 S7 S8 180 7.02 280 11.02 585 23. make sure that the connection busbars or cables don’t reduce the air insulation distances. When installing draw out S6 or S7 circuit breakers you should also take into account the dimensions of the metal supporting channel that needs to be fitted between the guides of the fixed parts of two adjacent circuit breakers.09 300 11.02 280 11.27 435 17. Minimum distance between centres for horizontally-installed circuit breakers Circuit breaker width [mm/in] 3 poles 4 poles 280 11.27 210 8.27 210 8.09 180 7.81 1SDC210769F0023 6 1SDC210770F0023 1 2 3 ABB Connection not insulated Insulated cable Cable terminals 6/73 .13 4 poles 280 11.03 S6 S7 S8 210 8. The distances between centres are for the installation of fixed and plug in circuit breakers.

O .

..................... 7/16 Molded case switches ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7/18 Breaking parts ........................................................................... 7/25 Accessories .............................................. 7/3 Power distribution circuit breakers .......... 7/23 Cradles.......................................... 7/2 Instructions for ordering ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7/22 Loose trip unit ...................................................................................................................................Ordering codes Index General information ......... conversion kit and accessories for cradles .................. 7/28 7 ABB 7/1 ......... 7/5 Motor control protection circuit breakers.................................................................................................................

Ordering codes General information Abbreviations used to describe the apparatus F = Front terminals EF = Front extended terminals ES = Front extended spread terminals FC Cu = Front terminals for copper cables FC CuAl = Front terminals for Cu/Al cables FC CuAl = Front terminals for Cu/Al cables (housed externally) RC CuAl = Rear terminals for Cu/Al cables R= Rear terminals MC = Multi-cable terminals HR for RC221/222 = Rear flat horizontal terminals HR/VR = Rear flat terminals HR = Rear flat horizontal terminals VR = Rear flat vertical terminals I3 Magnetic trip current [A] Iu Rated uninterrupted current of the circuit breaker [A] Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity [A] Rated short-time withstand current for 1s N= 50% Protection of N= 100% the neutral at 50% or at 100% of that of the phases [A] In Rated current of the thermomagnetic trip unit [A] Icu Icw TMF = Thermomagnetic trip unit with fixed thermal and magnetic threshold = Thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal and fixed magnetic threshold TMA = Thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal and magnetic threshold = Thermomagnetic trip unit for generator protection MF MA = Fixed magnetic only trip units = Adjustable magnetic only trip units TMD TMG PR22_ = Electronic trip units PR23_ = Electronic trip units PR33_ = Electronic trip units 7 7/2 ABB .

. MOE-E and AUE with ADP adapter. MOE. 1) T4-T5 electrical accessories on moving part of plug-in circuit breaker Fitting the moving parts of plug-in T4-T5 circuit breakers with i.240 V AC – 220.R1 T5N 400 F F TMA 400 3p Kit W MP T5 400 3p UVR-C 24. always requires the appropriate ADP adapters indicated in the catalogue.. RHE and AUE 1SDA...250 V AC/DC ADP – 10 pin adapter AUC 1Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC ADP – 6 pin adapter 055438 054839 054873 054897 054924 054910 054922 2) T4-T5 electrical accessories on moving part of draw out circuit breaker Fitting the moving parts of T4-T5 draw out circuit breakers can only take place using electrical accessories in the cabled version. AUX-C. The following examples are of particular importance for correctly loading orders for circuit breakers fitted with accessories. UVR-C.. UVR-C.R1 T4L 250 F F P221DS-LS/I 100 3p Kit P MP T4 3p AUX-C 3Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC ADP – 12 pin adapter 055438 054839 054911 054923 b) Tmax T4L 250 moving part of plug-in circuit breaker with SOR-C. MOE and AUX-C 1SDA.Ordering codes Instructions for ordering Ordering circuit breakers fitted with the accessories indicated in the catalogue means that these must be indicated by means of the relative sales codes expressly associated with the circuit breaker code.2 Standard... All circuit breakers in this section and all accessories identified by UL symbol conform to UL 489 and CSA C22. SOR-C.. a) Tmax T4L 250 moving part of plug-in circuit breakers with cabled auxiliary contacts 1SDA. MOE-E and AUE accessories..250 V DC ADP – 10 pin adapter 055422 054841 054933 054925 054873 054924 7 ABB 7/3 . in the case of cabled electrical accessories SOR-C..R1 T4S 250 PR221DS-LS/I 100 3p F F KIT W MP T4 3p RHE normal for draw out circuit breaker AUE – 2 early contacts SOR-C 220...R1 T4L 250 F F P221DS-LS/I 100 3p Kit P MP T4 3p SOR-C 220. AUX-C... i.e.240 V AC / 220. a) Tmax T5N 400 3p moving part of draw out circuit breaker with UVR-C and MOE 1SDA.. MOE.30 V AC/DC MOE T4-T5 24 V DC ADP – 10 pin adapter 060631 054845 054887 054894 054924 b) Tmax T4S 250 moving part of draw out circuit breaker SOR-C..250V DC MOE T4-T5 220..e...

Ordering codes Instructions for ordering 3) T4-T5 mechanical interlock The rear interlock for T4 and T5. code 1SDA050093R1 must be specified regarding the second circuit breaker (or cradle) which is to be interlocked... consisting of the MIR-HB or MIR-VB frame unit and the MIR-P plates.R1 POS1 T4H 250 PR221DS-LS/I 250 3p F F MIR-HB horizontal interlock frame unit MIR-P plates for type C interlock POS2 T5L 400 PR221DS-LS/I 400 3p F F Code for circuit breakers mounted on the plate 055431 054946 054950 058168 050093 7 7/4 ABB . To be able to receive the circuit breakers mounted directly on the interlock plate. allows use of all the front accessories compatible with the circuit breakers used. Horizontal mechanical interlock made between T4H 250 and T5L 400 1SDA.

.TMF Icu (277 V) 15(1) 20 1SDC210813F0023 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 (1) Icu = 15 kA T1 1p 100 – Fixed (F) – 1 Pole – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 100 A .. R1 B 18 kA 061824 061825 061826 061827 061828 061829 061830 061831 061832 061833 061834 1SDC210813F0023 Thermomagnetic trip unit with fixed thresholds .. R1 B 18 kA 053870 053871 053872 053873 053874 053875 053876 053877 053878 053879 053880 Thermomagnetic trip unit with fixed thresholds .... R1 N 22 kA 053533 053534 053535 053536 053537 053538 053539 053540 053541 053542 053543 Thermomagnetic trip unit with fixed thresholds .Front terminals for copper and alluminium cables (FC CuAl) In I3 1SDA .Front terminals for copper and alluminium cables (FC CuAl) In 1SDC210814F0023 I3 1SDA ..TMF Icu (480 V) 15(1) 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 (1) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 7 7/5 Icu = 15 kA ABB ..TMF Icu (277 V) 15(1) 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 (1) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 Icu = 15 kA T1 100 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 100 A .....Front terminals for copper and alluminium cables (FC Cu) In I3 1SDA ..Ordering codes Power distribution circuit breakers T1 1p 100 – Fixed (F) – 1 Pole – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 100 A ...

R1 N 22 kA 061799 061800 061801 061802 061803 061804 061805 061806 061807 061808 061809 1SDC210814F0023 Thermomagnetic trip unit with fixed thresholds .TMF Icu (480 V) 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 T1 100 – Fixed (F) – 4 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 100 A .Front terminals for copper and alluminium cables (FC CuAl) In Thermomagnetic trip unit .... R1 N 22 kA 061810 061811 061812 061813 061814 061815 061816 061818 061819 061820 061821 Thermomagnetic trip unit with fixed thresholds ..Front terminals for copper cables (FC Cu) In I3 1SDA .TMF Icu (480 V) 1SDC210814F0023 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 7 7/6 ABB ...Front terminals for copper cables (FC Cu) In I3 1SDA . R1 N Icu (480 V) 22 kA 053544 053545 053546 053547 053548 053549 053550 053551 053552 053553 053554 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 T1 100 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 100 A ......TMD 15 20 1SDC210814F0023 I3 1SDA .....Ordering codes Power distribution circuit breakers T1 100 – Fixed (F) – 4 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 100 A .

.......Front terminals (F) In 1SDC210814F0023 I3 1SDA .. R1 S H 65 kA 053928 053929 053930 053931 053932 053933 053934 053935 053936 053937 053938 053939 35 kA 053904 053905 053906 053907 053908 053909 053910 053911 053912 053913 053914 053915 Thermomagnetic trip unit with fixed thresholds . R1 S H 65 kA 053916 053917 053918 053919 053920 053921 053922 053923 053924 053925 053926 053927 35 kA 053892 053893 053894 053895 053896 053897 053898 053899 053900 053901 053902 053903 Thermomagnetic trip unit with fixed thresholds .T2 100 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 100 A .. For T2 with PR221DS the following groups of auxiliary contacts are available: – 1SDA053704R1 Aux-C 1S51-1Q-1SY – 1SDA055504R1 Aux-C 2Q-1SY 7 7/7 ... R1 S H 65 kA 055223 055224 055225 Icu (480 V) 35 kA 055217 055218 055219 Electronic trip unit PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I 25 60 100 ABB Note: The trip coil of the T2 circuit breaker with PR221DS electronic trip unit is housed in the right slot.. For T2 with PR221DS the following groups of auxiliary contacts are available: – 1SDA053704R1 Aux-C 1S51-1Q-1SY – 1SDA055504R1 Aux-C 2Q-1SY T2 100 – Fixed (F) – 4 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 100 A .... R1 S H 65 kA 055220 055221 055222 Icu (480 V) 35 kA 055214 055215 055216 Electronic trip unit PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I 25 60 100 Note: The trip coil of the T2 circuit breaker with PR221DS electronic trip unit is housed in the right slot.TMF Icu (480 V) 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 In 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1SDA ....TMF Icu (480 V) 15 20 1SDC210814F0023 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 600 700 800 900 1000 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 In 1SDA .Front terminals (F) In I3 1SDA ...

. R1 N S 35 kA 053587 053588 053589 053590 053591 053592 053593 053594 053595 053596 25 kA 053567 053568 053569 053570 053571 053572 053573 053574 053575 053576 Thermomagnetic trip unit with fixed thresholds ....Front terminals (F) In 1SDC210814F0023 I3 1SDA .TMF Icu (480 V) 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 600 700 800 900 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 7 7/8 ABB .TMF Icu (480 V) 60 70 1SDC210814F0023 600 700 800 900 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 T3 225 – Fixed (F) – 4 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 225 A ....Front terminals (F) In I3 1SDA .. R1 N S 35 kA 053577 053578 053579 053580 053581 053582 053583 053584 053585 053586 25 kA 053557 053558 053559 053560 053561 053562 053563 053564 053565 053566 Thermomagnetic trip unit with fixed thresholds ...Ordering codes Power distribution circuit breakers T3 225 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 225 A .

R1 N Icu (480 V) 25 kA 064123 064124 064125 064126 064127 064128 064129 064130 064131 Electronic trip unit PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSIG PR222DS/P-LSIG PR222DS/P-LSIG 100 150 250 100 150 250 100 150 250 T4 250 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 250 A .T4 250 – Fixed (F) – 2 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 250 A . TMD and TMA 30 40 1SDC210815F0023 500 500 500 400.....1000 625. R1 H 65 kA 055429 055430 055431 055432 055433 055434 055435 055436 055437 L V 150 kA 055447 055448 055449 055450 055451 055452 055453 055454 055455 100 kA 055438 055439 055440 055441 055442 055443 055444 055445 055446 055420 055421 055422 055423 055424 055425 055426 055427 055428 7 ABB 7/9 .2500 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 In 1SDA ..TMF........Front terminals (F) In 1SDC210815F0023 I3 N Thermomagnetic trip unit .1250 750…1500 1000....TMF..2000 1250.....1000 625.... R1 N Icu (480 V) 25 kA 064113 064114 064115 064117 064118 064119 064120 064121 064122 Thermomagnetic trip unit .800 500...2500 Icu (480 V) 25 kA 060094 057175 057176 057177 057179 057180 057181 057182 057183 057184 S 35 kA 1SDA . R1 H 65 kA 060182 057194 057195 057196 057197 057198 057199 057200 057201 057203 L V 150 kA 060184 058141 058142 058143 058144 058145 058146 058147 058148 058149 100 kA 060183 057204 057205 057206 058135 058136 058137 058138 058139 058140 060181 060185 060186 060187 060188 060189 060190 060191 060192 060193 N Electronic trip unit PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSIG PR222DS/P-LSIG PR222DS/P-LSIG 100 150 250 100 150 250 100 150 250 Icu (480 V) 25 kA 055411 055412 055413 055414 055415 055416 055417 055418 055419 S 35 kA 1SDA ......Front terminals (F) In I3 1SDA ....800 500.. TMD and TMA 20 30 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 In 500 500 500 500 400.....1250 750…1500 1000.2000 1250...

TMF.Front terminals (F) In I3 1SDA ... R1 N H 65 kA 060105 060106 060107 060108 060109 060110 060111 060112 060113 060114 Icu (480 V) 25 kA 060095 060096 060097 060098 060099 060100 060101 060102 060103 060104 Thermomagnetic trip unit ...... R1 N H 65 kA 060091 060092 060093 060445 060446 060447 060448 060449 060450 Icu (480 V) 25 kA 060088 060089 060090 060439 060440 060441 060442 060443 060444 Electronic trip unit PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSIG PR222DS/P-LSIG PR222DS/P-LSIG 100 150 250 100 150 250 100 150 250 7 7/10 ABB ....2500 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 In 1SDA .800 500.1250 750…1500 1000...1000 625..... TMD and TMA 20 30 1SDC210815F0023 500 500 500 500 400....2000 1250..Ordering codes Power distribution circuit breakers T4 250 – Fixed (F) – 4 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 250 A .

.........Front terminals (F) In Thermomagnetic trip unit .. R1 N Icu (480 V) 25 kA 064134 064135 064136 064137 064138 064139 Electronic trip unit PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSIG PR222DS/P-LSIG 300 400 300 400 300 400 T5 400 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 400 A .TMA 300 400 1SDC210816F0023 I3 1SDA ..T5 400 – Fixed (F) – 2 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 400 A ...Front terminals (F) In 1SDC210816F0023 I3 N Thermomagnetic trip unit .. R1 N Icu (480 V) 25 kA 064132 064133 1500…3000 2000…4000 In 1SDA .... R1 N S 35 kA 058156 058157 055502 058158 058159 058160 H 65 kA 058161 058162 058163 058164 058165 058166 L 100 kA 058167 058168 058169 058170 058171 058172 V 150 kA 058173 058174 058175 058176 058177 058178 Icu (480 V) 25 kA 058150 058151 058152 058153 058154 058155 Electronic trip unit PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSIG PR222DS/P-LSIG 300 400 300 400 300 400 7 ABB 7/11 . R1 H 65 kA 060638 060639 L V 150 kA 060646 060647 100 kA 060642 060643 060634 060635 1SDA ....TMA 300 400 In 1500…3000 2000…4000 Icu (480 V) 25 kA 060630 060631 S 35 kA 1SDA .

. R1 N H 65 kA 060117 060118 060455 060456 060457 060458 Icu (480 V) 25 kA 060115 060116 060451 060452 060453 060454 Electronic trip unit PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSIG PR222DS/P-LSIG 300 400 300 400 300 400 T5 600 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 600 A ....Front terminals (F) In N Electronic trip unit PR221DS-LS/I PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSIG 600 600 600 Icu (480 V) 25 kA 061836 061837 061838 S 35 kA 1SDA ... R1 H 65 kA 061842 061843 061844 L V 150 kA 061848 061849 061850 100 kA 061845 061846 061847 061839 061840 061841 7 7/12 ABB .TMA 300 400 In 1500…3000 2000…4000 I3 N Icu (480 V) 25 kA 060632 060633 S 35 kA 1SDA .Ordering codes Power distribution circuit breakers T5 400 – Fixed (F) – 4 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 400 A .........Front terminals (F) In Thermomagnetic trip unit .. R1 H 65 kA 060640 060641 L V 150 kA 060648 060649 100 kA 060644 060645 060636 060637 1SDA .

..TM 600 800 600 800 In 1500 2000 3000…6000 4000…8000 I3 N Icu (480 V) 50 kA 053851 053852 044411 044412 H 65 kA 1SDA ...... R1 L 100 kA 044415 044416 044419 044420 N Electronic trip unit PR211 I PR211 I PR211 LI PR211 LI PR212 LSI PR212 LSI PR212 LSIG PR212 LSIG 600 800 600 800 600 800 600 800 Icu (480 V) 50 kA 044820 044821 037097 037098 044822 044823 044824 044825 H 65 kA 1SDA . R1 N Icu (480 V) 50 kA 053858 053859 1SDA . R1 N H 65 kA 044808 044809 037093 037094 044810 044811 044812 044813 L 100 kA 044814 044815 037095 037096 044816 044817 044818 044819 Icu (480 V) 50 kA 044802 044803 037091 037092 044804 044805 044806 044807 Electronic trip unit PR211 I PR211 I PR211 LI PR211 LI PR212 LSI PR212 LSI PR212 LSIG PR212 LSIG 600 800 600 800 600 800 600 800 S6 800 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 800 A ....TM 600 800 In 3000…6000 4000…8000 I3 1SDA . R1 L 100 kA 044417 044418 044413 044414 1SDA .......TM 600 800 In 3000…6000 4000…8000 I3 N Icu (480 V) 50 kA 044409 044410 H 65 kA 1SDA . R1 N Icu (480 V) 50 kA 052031 052032 Electronic trip unit PR211 LI PR211 LI 600 800 7 7/13 ABB .....S6 800 – Fixed (F) – 2 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 800 A ...... R1 L 100 kA 044832 044833 037101 037102 044834 044835 044836 044837 044826 044827 037099 037100 044828 044829 044830 044831 S6 800 – Fixed (F) – 4 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 800 A .Front terminals (F) In Thermomagnetic trip unit .Front terminals (F) In Thermomagnetic trip unit .Front terminals (F) In Thermomagnetic trip unit ......

.....Ordering codes Power distribution circuit breakers S7 1200 – Fixed (F) – 2 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 1200 A .. R1 H Icu (480 V) 65 kA 044798 044799 044838 044839 044840 044841 044842 044843 Electronic trip unit PR211 I PR211 I PR211 LI PR211 LI PR212 LSI PR212 LSI PR212 LSIG PR212 LSIG 1000 1200 1000 1200 1000 1200 1000 1200 S7 1200 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 1200 A . R1 H Icu (480 V) 65 kA 044844 044845 037384 037385 044846 044847 044848 044849 Electronic trip unit PR211 I PR211 I PR211 LI PR211 LI PR212 LSI PR212 LSI PR212 LSIG PR212 LSIG 1000 1200 1000 1200 1000 1200 1000 1200 S7 1200 – Fixed (F) – 4 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 1200 A ....Front terminals (F) In 1SDA .... R1 H Icu (480 V) 65 kA 052947 052948 052949 052950 052951 052952 Electronic trip unit PR211 LI PR211 LI PR212 LSI PR212 LSI PR212 LSIG PR212 LSIG 1000 1200 1000 1200 1000 1200 7 7/14 ABB ....Front terminals (F) In 1SDA .Front terminals (F) In 1SDA .

Front terminals (F) In 1SDA ..... R1 V Icu (480 V) 100 kA 048094 048096 Electronic trip unit PR212 LSI PR212 LSIG 2000 2000 S8 2500 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 2500 A ....S8 1600 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 1600 A .Front terminals (F) In 1SDA ...... R1 V Icu (480 V) 100 kA 048097 048098 Electronic trip unit PR212 LSI PR212 LSIG 2500 2500 7 ABB 7/15 ... R1 V Icu (480 V) 100 kA 048093 048095 Electronic trip unit PR212 LSI PR212 LSIG 1600 1600 S8 2000 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 2000 A ..Front terminals (F) In 1SDA .

..2400 I3 1SDA ........1200 I3 1SDA ....1500 900... R1 S H 65 kA 055466 055467 055468 Icu (480 V) 35 kA 055463 055464 055465 Electronic trip unit for motor protection PR221 DS-I PR221 DS-I PR221 DS-I 25 60 100 T3 225 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 225 A ...Front terminals (F) In N Electronic trip unit for motor protection PR221 DS-I PR221 DS-I PR221 DS-I 100 150 250 Icu (480 V) 25 kA 059448 059449 059450 S 35 kA 1SDA ....Front terminals (F) In Magnetic only trip unit ......1200 750. R1 H 65 kA 059454 059455 059456 L 100 kA 059457 059458 059459 059451 059452 059453 T5 400 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 400 A ...... R1 S Icu (480 V) 35 kA 055167 055168 055169 H 65 kA 055170 055171 055172 1SDA .. R1 S Icu (480 V) 35 kA 054163 054164 054165 054166 T4 250 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 250 A ...MA 20 50 100 In 120…240 300…600 600. R1 H 65 kA 059464 059465 L 100 kA 059466 059467 059462 059463 T5 600 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 600 A ...Front terminals (F) In N S 35 kA 1SDA ... R1 H 65 kA 061853 L 7 7/16 Electronic trip unit for motor protection PR221 DS-I 600 Icu (480 V) 25 kA 061851 100 kA 061854 061852 ABB .1800 1200..Front terminals (F) In N Electronic trip unit for motor protection PR221 DS-I PR221 DS-I 300 400 Icu (480 V) 25 kA 059460 059461 S 35 kA 1SDA ..MA 100 125 150 200 600..Ordering codes Motor control protection circuit breakers T2 100 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 100 A .Front terminals (F) In Magnetic only trip unit ..

.. R1 L 100 kA 044404 044405 044401 044402 S7 1200 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 1200 A ...Front terminals (F) In 1SDA ....Front terminals (F) In N Electronic trip unit for motor protection PR211/P-I PR211/P-I 600 800 Icu (480 V) 50 kA 044400 044403 H 65 kA 1SDA ...Front terminals (F) In 1SDA ..... R1 H Icu (480 V) 65 kA 044407 044408 Electronic trip unit for motor protection PR211/P-I PR211/P-I 1000 1200 S8 1600 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 1600 A ....Front terminals (F) In 1SDA ..S6 800 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 800 A ..... R1 V Icu (480 V) 65 kA 048814 Electronic trip unit for motor protection PR211/P-I 2000 S8 2500 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 2500 A .Front terminals (F) In 1SDA .. R1 V Icu (480 V) 65 kA 048813 Electronic trip unit for motor protection PR211/P-I 1600 S8 2000 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 2000 A . R1 V Icu (480 V) 65 kA 048815 Electronic trip unit for motor protection PR211/P-I 2500 7 ABB 7/17 ....

... R1 3 poles Icw 053597 3...6 kA 053600 4 poles T4N-D 250 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 250 A ...Front terminals for copper and alluminium cables (FC CuAl) In 3 poles Icw 160 053555 2 kA 053556 1SDA .....Front terminals (F) 1SDA ... R1 3 poles Icw 3.......6 kA 064145 T4S-D 250 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 250 A ....Front terminals for copper cables (FC Cu) In 3 poles Icw 160 061822 2 kA 061823 1SDA .Front terminals (F) 1SDA . R1 3 poles Icw 053599 3.. R1 3 poles Icw 3...6 kA 053598 4 poles T3S-D 225 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 225 A ..6 kA 064146 7 7/18 ABB .. R1 4 poles T3S-D 150 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 150 A .Front terminals (F) 1SDA . R1 4 poles T1N-D 100 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 100 A .Front terminals (F) 1SDA ..Ordering codes Molded case switches T1N-D 100 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 100 A ...

Front terminals (F) 1SDA ...6 kA 063284 T4V-D 250 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 250 A ..T4H-D 250 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 250 A ... R1 3 poles Icw 6 kA 064147 T5S-D 400 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 400 A .. R1 3 poles Icw 058525 3.Front terminals (F) 1SDA ..6 kA 060123 4 poles T4L-D 250 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 250 A ....6 kA 063285 T5N-D 400 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 400 A ... R1 3 poles Icw 3........ R1 3 poles Icw 3.Front terminals (F) 1SDA .. R1 3 poles Icw 058527 6 kA 060124 4 poles 7 ABB 7/19 ....Front terminals (F) 1SDA .Front terminals (F) 1SDA ......Front terminals (F) 1SDA . R1 3 poles Icw 6 kA 064148 T5H-D 400 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 400 A ...

...... R1 3 poles Icw 6 kA 063738 T5V-D 400 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 400 A ........Front terminals (F) 1SDA ...Front terminals (F) 1SDA .Ordering codes Molded case switches T5L-D 400 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 400 A ... R1 3 poles Icw 6 kA 063739 T5N-D 600 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 600 A ....Front terminals (F) 1SDA . R1 3 poles Icw 6 kA 061855 T5L-D 600 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 600 A ... R1 3 poles Icw 6 kA 063286 7 7/20 ABB .. R1 3 poles Icw 6 kA 064149 T5S-D 600 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 600 A ....Front terminals (F) 1SDA .Front terminals (F) 1SDA ... R1 3 poles Icw 6 kA 064150 T5H-D 600 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 600 A .Front terminals (F) 1SDA ...

.. R1 3 poles Icw 044399 10 kA 052933 4 poles S7H-D 1200 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 1200 A ..Front terminals (F) 1SDA . R1 3 poles Icw 052931 8 kA 052932 4 poles S6H-D 800 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 800 A ....... R1 3 poles Icw 6 kA 063287 S6H-D 600 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 600 A .T5V-D 600 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 600 A ..... R1 3 poles Icw 044406 20 kA 052934 4 poles S8V-D 2500 – Fixed (F) – UL listed Iu (40 °C) = 2500 A ....Front terminals (F) 1SDA ...Front terminals (F) 1SDA ..Front terminals (F) 1SDA ... R1 3 poles Icw 35 kA 048099 7 ABB 7/21 .Front terminals (F) 1SDA .....

. R1 3 poles T4N 250 Breaking Part T4S 250 Breaking Part T4H 250 Breaking Part T4L 250 Breaking Part T4V 250 Breaking Part 058511 058512 058513 058514 058515 4 poles 060119 060120 T5 400 – UL listed F = Front terminals (F) 1SDA .. R1 3 poles T5N 600 Breaking Part T5S 600 Breaking Part T5H 600 Breaking Part T5L 600 Breaking Part T5V 600 Breaking Part 061856 061857 061858 061859 061860 4 poles 7 7/22 ABB ... R1 3 poles T5N 400 Breaking Part T5S 400 Breaking Part T5H 400 Breaking Part T5L 400 Breaking Part T5V 400 Breaking Part 058516 058517 058518 058519 058520 4 poles 060121 060122 T5 600 – UL listed F = Front terminals (F) 1SDA ........Ordering codes Breaking parts T4 250 – UL listed F = Front terminals (F) 1SDA .....

..TMF. R1 4 poles 7 ABB 7/23 ..TMA TMA 300-1500...... TMD and TMA TMF 20-500 TMD 30-300 TMD 40-400 TMD 50-500 TMA 80-400.1500 1000..2000 TMA 250-1250..1000 TMA 125-625..2500 060130 058534 058535 060017 060018 060019 060020 058536 060021 060022 I3 3 poles 1SDA ..3000 TMA 400-2000..800 TMA 100-500.......1250 750.2000 1250..800 500........1500 TMA 200-1000.. R1 4 poles N=100% 060131 060132 060133 060134 060135 060136 060137 060138 060139 060140 T5 Trip Unit – UL listed In Thermomagnetic Trip Unit ....2500 20 30 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 500 300 400 500 400..1250 TMA 150-750. R1 4 poles N=100% 060652 060653 T4 Trip Unit – UL listed In 3 poles Electronic Trip Unit PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSIG PR222DS/P-LSIG PR222DS/P-LSIG PR222DS/PD-A-LSI PR222DS/PD-A-LSI PR222DS/PD-A-LSI PR222DS/PD-A-LSIG PR222DS/PD-A-LSIG PR222DS/PD-A-LSIG 100 150 250 100 150 250 100 150 250 100 150 250 100 150 250 054603 055456 054605 054609 055457 054611 054612 055458 054614 060665 058532 060666 060667 058533 060668 054615 060125 054617 054621 060126 054623 054624 060127 054626 060671 060128 060672 060673 060129 060674 1SDA ...4000 300 400 1500…3000 2000…4000 060650 060651 I3 3 poles 1SDA .1000 625.....Ordering codes Loose trip unit T4 Trip Unit – UL listed In Thermomagnetic Trip Unit ......

..Ordering codes Loose trip unit T5 Trip Unit – UL listed In 3 poles Electronic Trip Unit PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I PR221DS-LS/I PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSI PR222DS/P-LSIG PR222DS/P-LSIG PR222DS/P-LSIG PR222DS/PD-A-LSI PR222DS/PD-A-LSI PR222DS/PD-A-LSI PR222DS/PD-A-LSIG PR222DS/PD-A-LSIG PR222DS/PD-A-LSIG 300 400 600 300 400 600 300 400 600 300 400 600 300 400 600 058541 054692 061861 058542 054696 061862 058543 054698 061863 058545 060669 061864 058546 060670 061865 060144 060676 060143 060675 060142 054706 058544 054704 060141 054700 1SDA . R1 4 poles 7 7/24 ABB ....

..... R1 3 poles T4 P FP HR T5 400 P FP HR T5 600 P FP HR (1) 4 poles 054742(1) 054754(1) 054739(1) 054751(1) 054764(1) UL listed Draw out (W) – Cradle EF = Front extended terminals 1SDA .. R1 3 poles T4 W FP EF T5 W 400 FP EF T5 W 600 FP EF S6 W FP EF S7 W FP EF (1) 4 poles 054746(1) 054758(1) 013974 014097 054743(1) 054755(1) 054768(1) 013964 048951 UL listed VR = Front flat vertical terminals 1SDA ................ R1 3 poles T4 P FP EF T5 400 P FP EF T5 600 P FP EF (1) 4 poles 054740(1) 054752(1) 054737(1) 054749(1) 054762(1) UL listed VR = Rear flat vertical terminals 1SDA .... R1 3 poles T2 P FP F T3 P FP F (1) 4 poles 051330(1) 051332(1) 051329(1) 051331(1) UL listed 1SDC210823F0023 EF = Front extended terminals 1SDA ..Ordering codes Cradles. R1 3 poles T4 P FP VR T5 400 P FP VR T5 600 P FP VR (1) 4 poles 054741(1) 054753(1) 054738(1) 054750(1) 054763(1) UL listed HR = Rear flat horizontal terminals 1SDA .... conversion kit and accessories for cradles Plug-in (P) – Cradle F = Front terminals 1SDA ... R1 3 poles T4 W FP VR T5 W 400 FP VR T5 W 600 FP VR S6 W FP VR S7 W FP VR (1) 4 poles 054747(1) 054759(1) 013981 014105 054744(1) 054756(1) 054769(1) 013972 014096 7 7/25 UL listed ABB .

.. R1 3 poles T4 W FP HR T5 W 400 FP HR T5 W 600 FP HR S6 W FP HR S7 W FP HR (1) 4 poles 054748(1) 054761(1) 013977 014101 054745(1) 054757(1) 054770(1) 013968(1) 014092(1) UL listed 1SDC210823F0023 Conversion of the version Conversion kit from fixed into moving part of plug-in Type 3 poles Kit P MP T2 Kit P MP T3 1SDC210824F0023 1SDA ..... R1 4 poles 051412(1) 051414(1) 054840(1) 054844(1) 051411(1) 051413(1) 054839(1) 054843 054847 (1) (1) Kit P MP T4 Kit P MP T5 400 Kit P MP T5 600 (1) UL listed Note: The plug-in version must be composed as follows 1) Fixed circuit breaker 2) Conversion kit from fixed into moving part of plug-in 3) Cradle of plug-in Conversion kit from fixed into moving part of draw out Type 3 poles Kit W MP T4 Kit W MP T5 400 1SDC210825F0023 1SDA ..... R1 4 poles 054842(1) 054846(1) 013963 014087 054841(1) 054845 (1) Kit W MP T5 600 Kit W MP S6 800 Kit W MP S7 (1) 054849(1) 013962 023299 UL listed Note: The draw out version must be composed as follows 1) Fixed circuit breaker 2) Conversion kit from fixed into moving part of draw out 3) Cradle of draw out 4) Front for lever operating mechanism or rotary handle or motor operator Conversion kit from cradle of plug-in into cradle of draw out Type 1SDC210826F0023 1SDA..R1 054854(1) 054855(1) Kit FP P in FP W T4 Kit FP P in FP W T5 (1) 7 7/26 UL listed ABB .....Ordering codes Cradles. conversion kit and accessories for cradles HR = Front flat horizontal terminals 1SDA .....

..R1 4 poles 054858 054861 7 7/27 ABB ..TC-FP Type 3 poles TC-FP T4 TC-FP T5 400 054857 054859 1SDA.HR S6 S7 (1) 1SDA.R1 S6-S7 013859 025546 013860 025547 Lock for cradle of draw out circuit breaker Type T4-T5 KLF-D FP .. Position contacts Type Contacts for signalling circuit breaker racked out Contacts for signalling circuit breaker racked out for digital signals Contacts for signalling circuit breaker racked in Contacts for signalling circuit breaker racked in for digital signals 1SDA.R1 4 pieces 013985 014109 055272 054832 054834 054836 054838 013989 014113 013989 014113 013984 014108 055271 054831 054833 054835(1) 054837(1) 013988 014112 013988 014112 UL listed Note: The FC Cu and FC CuAl terminals are supplied with insulating terminal covers for TC-FP cradles..FC CuAl FC CuAl T4 1x185mm2 FC CuAl T5 1x240mm2 Rear flat vertical terminals .ES ES T5 (600 A) Front terminals for copper cables ..Lock type Ronis Padlock device cradle Key lock for cradle ..same key for sets of circuit breakers 055230 055231 055232 055233 013872 025434 025435 1SDA.R1 S6-S7 Terminal covers for cradle .VR S6 S7 Rear flat horizontal terminals .Same key for different groups of circuit breakers PLL FP .FC Cu FC Cu T4 1x185mm2 FC Cu T5 1x240mm2 Front terminals for copper-aluminium cables .EF S6 S7 Front extended spread terminals .Terminals for cradles Type 3 pieces Front extended terminals .Lock padlocks KLF-D Ronis FP .different key for each circuit breaker Key lock for cradle .........Different key for each circuit breaker KLF-S FP ..

...150 V AC SOR 160 V DC-150…180 V AC SOR 200.125 V DC SCR 120 V AC 60 Hz SCR 208…220 V AC 60 Hz SCR 220.500 V AC (1) 054873 (1) 014140(1) 053683(1) 054874(1) 046608(1) 037514 053684(1) 054875(1) UL listed Closing coil .....240 V AC ...120 V AC ....127 V AC ..60 V AC / DC SOR 60 V DC SOR 100…127 V AC / DC SOR 110....250 V DC SCR 240 V AC 60 Hz SCR 415…440 V AC 50 Hz ..30 V AC / DC SOR 30 V DC SOR 48 V AC / DC SOR-C 48..125 V DC SOR 127...Ordering codes Accessories Service releases Shunt trip ..110..........440 V AC SOR 380…500 V AC SOR 480 V AC SOR-C 480...SCR Type SCR 24 V AC 60 Hz SCR 24 V DC SCR 48 V DC SCR 110.110..250 V DC SOR 220.480 V AC 60 Hz (1) 1SDA.125 V DC 054871 (1) 046600(1) 046603(1) 047564(1) 014138(1) 053681(1) 054872(1) 046605(1) 047565(1) 046607(1) 053682 (1) 1SDC210828F0023 SOR-C 110.250 V DC / 200…255 V AC SOR-C 220....SOR Type T1-T2-T3 SOR-C 12 V DC SOR 12 V DC 1SDC210827F0023 1SDA.240 V AC .250 V DC SOR-C 380.R1 S8 046649(1) 046650(1) 046651(1) 046652(1) 046647(1) 046641(1) 046653(1) 046648(1) 046642(1) UL listed 7 7/28 ABB .R1 T4-T5 054869(1) 023404(1) 014136(1) 050685(1) 053679(1) 054870(1) 046602(1) 014137(1) 053680 (1) S6-S7 S8 054157(1) SOR 24 V AC / DC SOR 24 V DC SOR-C 24..220...220..

127 V AC ....UVR Type T1-T2-T3 UVR 24 V AC UVR 24 V AC 50 Hz UVR 24 V DC 1SDC210827F0023 1SDA.R1 S6-S7 059446(1) 054879 (1) 054878(1) UL listed 7 ABB 7/29 .500 V AC UVR 500 V AC 50 Hz (1) 046627(1) 1SDC210828F0023 054889 (1) 046616(1) 046611(1) 046628(1) 053688(1) 054890(1) 014190(1) 046624(1) 014184 (1) 046623(1) 046618(1) 046609(1) 046629(1) 053689 (1) 054891 (1) 046617(1) 014192(1) 046625(1) 014185(1) 046622(1) 046612(1) 053690 (1) 054892 (1) 046619(1) 037515 053691(1) 054893(1) 046621(1) UL listed Shunt trip with permanent operation ....250 V DC UVR-C 220.....125…127 V AC 60 Hz UVR 110.....220 V AC 60 Hz UVR 220 V AC 50 Hz UVR 220.240 V AC .250 V DC UVR 230.125 V DC UVR 110.110.130 V AC 50 Hz UVR 208...PS-SOR Type T4-T5 PS-SOR-C 24..30 V AC / DC UVR 48 V AC UVR 48 V AC 50 Hz UVR 48 V DC UVR-C 48 V AC / DC UVR 60 V AC 50 Hz UVR 60 V DC UVR-C 60 V AC/DC UVR 100 V AC 50 Hz .125 V DC UVR-C 110...120 V AC (1) 1SDA....440 V AC 50 Hz ..277 V 60 Hz UVR 240 V AC UVR 240 V AC 60 Hz UVR 250 V DC UVR 380 V AC 60 Hz UVR 380.440 V AC 60 Hz UVR-C 380....400 V AC 50 Hz .480 V AC 60 Hz UVR 480 V AC UVR-C 480.Undervoltage release .220..440 V AC UVR 415..110…115 V AC 60 Hz UVR 110....240 V AC 50 Hz .....30 V DC PS-SOR 24 V AC / DC PS-SOR-C 110..R1 T4-T5 S6-S7 014188(1) 046613(1) 014179(1) 046626(1) 046620(1) 046631(1) 053685(1) 054887(1) 014189(1) 046614(1) 014181(1) 053686(1) 054888(1) 046615(1) 046632(1) 053687 (1) S8 UVR 30 V AC 50 Hz UVR 30 V DC UVR-C 24.115 V AC 50 Hz .......127 V AC UVR 120 V AC 60 Hz UVR 125 V DC UVR 127...

.duty releases (1) 1SDA.UVD Type UVD 24…30 V AC / DC UVD 48…60 V AC / DC UVD 110.L=1m For draw out circuit breakers ....R1 S8 Connectors for duty releases Type S6 For fixed circuit breakers .R1 T1…T5 051357 051358 051360 051361 Undervoltage releases + time-lag device Type S6-S7 UVR-D 110…220 V AC UVR-D 24.L=1m For draw out circuit breakers ......125 V AC / DC UVD 220.R1 T4-T5 051362 051363 051364 055273 Loose cables Type Kit 12 cables L=2m for AUX Kit 6 cables L=2m for AUX Kit 2 cables L=2m for SOR-UVR 1SDA.L=2m Extension for testing auxiliary circuits with the circuit breaker racked out .......R1 T1-T2-T3 051365 051366 051367 Time delay device for undervoltage release .R1 S7 037519(1) 044752 014210 048949 025552 025552 037516(1) 037523 013866 7 7/30 UL listed ABB .....L=2m For plug-in or draw out circuit breakers ....250 V AC / DC 1SDA...L=1m For fixed circuit breakers ..Ordering codes Accessories Connectors and socket-plugs for electrical accessories Type T1-T2-T3 Socket-plug 12 poles Socket-plug 6 poles Socket-plug 3 poles 3-way connector for second SOR-C 051362 051363 051364 1SDA.30 V AC / DC UVR-D 48 V AC / DC UVR-D 110…125 V AC / DC UVR-D 220…250 V AC / DC 014186 047553 047554 047555 047557 1SDA..

.1 contact signalling circuit breakers racked-in AUP-I T4-T5 24 V DC ....L=2m For plug-in or draw out circuit breakers .AUP Type T2-T3 AUP T2-T3 .Electrical signals Auxiliary contacts .R1 T4-T5 7 7/31 ABB . UL listed Connectors for auxiliary contacts Type S6 For fixed circuit breakers .. 1 NC and 1 release not tripped signal 2 NO.L=1m For fixed circuit breakers .1 contact for signalling circuit breakers racked-out 051372 054920 054918 054921 054919 1SDA..1 contact for signalling circuit breakers racked-in AUP-R T4-T5 24 V DC .R1 T4-T5 054910(3) 054911(3) 054912(3) 054913(3) 055361 063763 053704 055504 055050 054917 054916 023366(3) 023332(3) 025773(3) 048956 047563(3) 025774(3) 025775(3) 025776(3) 054915 S6-S7 S8 051370(3) 051371 (3) AUX-C 2Q 400 V AC AUX-C 3Q 1SY 24 V DC Cabled version with 2 m long cables AUX-C 3Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC Cabled version for T2 with PR221DS trip unit AUX-C 1S51 1Q SY AUX-C 2Q 1SY Cabled contact for signalling trip coil release trip AUX-SA 1 S51 T4-T5 Cabled contact for signalling manual/remote operation AUX-MO-C (2) Cabled contacts in electronic version AUX-E-C 1Q 1SY Auxiliary contacts 2 open/closed change-over contacts 1 open/closed change-over contacts and 1 release tripped signal 1 NO.. T5 and T6 in plug-in/draw out version..auxiliary contacts (1) 1SDA.L=1m For draw out circuit breakers . 1 NC and 1 release not tripped signal (1) (2) (3) These cannot be combined with the circuit breaker T2 fitted with PR221DS electronic trip unit. For T4.1 contact for signalling circuit breakers racked-out AUP-R T4-T5 400 V AC/DC ...AUX Type T1-T2-T3 Cabled version (1) with 1 m long cables AUX-C 1Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC AUX-C 3Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC AUX-C 1Q 1SY 400 V AC 1SDC210829F0023 1SDC210830F0023 1SDA.. 1 NC and 1 release tripped signal 3 open/closed change-over contacts Auxiliary contacts for digital signals 2 open/closed change-over contacts 1 open/closed change-over contacts and 1 release tripped signal 1 NO.. it is necessary to order a socket plug connector 3 poles 1SDA051364R1.R1 S7 037520(1) 044751 014208 048947 025553 025553 037517(1) 037522 013864 UL listed 1SDC210831F0023 Auxiliary position contacts .L=1m Extension for testing auxiliary circuits with the circuit breaker racked out .L=1m For draw out circuit breakers .1 contact signalling circuit breakers racked-in AUP-I T4-T5 400 V AC/DC .

. superimposed 110..Adapters 12pin ADP ..ADP Type 1SDC210833F0023 1SDA.60 V DC 1SDC210836F0023 1SDA... side-by-side... side-by-side.. 48.early making contact and connector for undervoltage release Adapters ...Adapters 6pin ADP . 110.R1 T1-T2-T3 059596(1) 059597(1) 1SDC210835F0023 MOS 5 cables..Adapters 5pin ADP ...R1 T4-T5 6pin checking extension for blanck tests on T4-T5-T6 P/W auxiliary contacts (1+1) service and residual current releases 12pin checking extension for blanck tests on T4-T5-T6 P/W auxiliary contacts (3+1) 10pin checking extension for blanck tests on T4-T5-T6 P/W motor operator and early contacts 055063 055064 055065 Motor operator Solenoid operator ..Adapters 10pin Testing extension Type 1SDC210834F0023 1SDA.R1 T4-T5 054925 025551 048106 S6 S7 051374 AUE . superimposed 48.250 V AC/DC (1) UL listed Note: It is always fitted with crimped cables MOS 5 cables T1-T2....early contacts 1SDC210832F0023 1SDA..MOS Type MOS 5 cables...250 V AC/DC (1) 059598(1) 059599(1) UL listed Note: It is always fitted with crimped cables 7 7/32 ABB ..R1 T4-T5 055173 054922 054923 054924 ADP .60 V DC MOS 5 cables T1-T2...Ordering codes Accessories Early auxiliary contacts .AUE Type T2-T3 AUE ..

motor operators (1) 1SDA.L=1m For draw out circuit breakers .60 V DC MOE T4-T5 110.R1 T4-T5 054894(1) 054895(1) 054896(1) 054897(1) 054898(1) MOE T4-T5 220......L=1m For fixed circuit breakers .125 V AC/DC 1SDC210837F0023 1SDA..R1 S7 037521(1) 044850 014204 048950 025554 025554 037518(1) 037524 013858 UL listed 7 ABB 7/33 .250 V AC/DC MOE T4-T5 380 V AC (1) UL listed Stored energy motor operator for Isomax Type S6 Motor operator 24 V DC Motor operator 48 V DC Motor operator 120…127 V AC / DC Motor operator 220…250 V AC / DC (1) 1SDA.L=2m Extension for testing auxiliary circuits with the circuit breaker racked out ...MOE Type MOE T4-T5 24 V DC MOE T4-T5 48...Stored energy motor operator .R1 S7 014214(1) 014215(1) 014216(1) 014217(1) 014029(1) 014030(1) 014031(1) 014032(1) UL listed Geared motor for automatic charging of closing springs Type 24/30 V DC 48/60 V DC 100…130 V AC / DC 220…250 V AC / DC (1) 1SDA....R1 S8 047558(1) 047559(1) 047560(1) 047561(1) UL listed Connectors for motor operating mechanism and auxiliary contacts Type S6 For fixed circuit breakers .....L=2m For plug-in or draw out circuit breakers .L=1m For draw out circuit breakers ......

.R1 T4-T5 054938(1) 013891 S6-S7 051392 UL listed 7 7/34 ABB ....Ordering codes Accessories Rotary handle operating mechanism Direct....R1 T4-T5 054929(1) 054930(1) 054933(1) 054934(1) 051385(1) 051386 (1) S6 014028 046569 050715 S7 014213 046572 050716 051383(1) 051384(1) 054931(1) 054935(1) 054932(1) 054936(1) 054937(1) 051387(1) 051388(1) UL listed IP54 protection for rotary handle Type T1-T2-T3 RHE_IP54 protection kit IP54 Protection IP54 for rotary handle (1) 1SDA....RHD Type T1-T2-T3 RHD normal for fixed and plug-in 1SDC210854F0023 1SDA.R1 T4-T5 054926(1) 054927(1) 054928(1) 055234(1) 046568 046570 014027 014212 S6 014026 S7 014211 051381(1) 051382(1) RHD_EM emergency for fixed and plug-in RHD normal for draw out RHD_EM di emergency for draw out RHD_EM emergency for fixed and draw out (1) UL listed 1SDC210855F0023 Transmitted ..RHE Type T1-T2-T3 RHE normal for fixed and plug-in RHE_EM emergency for fixed and plug-in RHE normal for draw out RHE_EM di emergency for draw out Individual components RHE_B just base for RHE for fixed and plug-in RHE_B just base for RHE draw out RHE_S just rod 500mm for RHE RHE_H just handle for RHE RHE_H_EM just emergency handle for RHE (1) 1SDA..

R1 S6-S7 053528 053529 053530 043514 051395 052015 052016 It cannot be mounted when there is a front operationg mechanism.same key for different groups of circuit breakers (N.T3 (1) 1SDA.same key for different groups of circuit breakers (N. 20007) KLF-S ... motor operator or RC221/RC222 residual current device and.T2 KLC-S same key ..T3 key lock type Ronis version with key removable in both positions KLC-S same key .different key Key lock in Open position for front plate or rotary handle same key for sets of circuit breakers Key lock for front flange 054939 054940 054941 054942 054943 013881 013882 045024 1SDA. 20008) Key lock in Open position for front plate or rotary handle .same key for different groups of circuit breakers (N.R1 T1-T2-T3 051393 051394(1) UL listed 1SDC210857F0023 “Ronis” key lock in open position on the circuit breaker .R1 S6-S7 S8 7 7/35 ABB .. 20006) RHL .. with the service releases (UVR.different key KLF-S .. only in the case of three pole circuit breakers. 20005) RHL .different keys for each circuit breaker/in open-closed position Key lock for front/rotary handle ...KLF Type T4-T5 KLF-D .different keys for each circuit breaker/in open position RHL .same key for different groups of circuit breakers (N.same key for different groups of circuit breakers (N.R1 T1-T2-T3 051389 051390 060147 060148 060149 052021 RHL .Operating mechanism and locks Padlock lever lock .T1 KLC same key .same key for different groups of circuit breakers (N....T1 KLC-S same key . 20008) RHL .RHL Type 1SDC210838F0023 1SDA. 20006) KLF-S . a rotary handle operating mechanism. SOR)... 20007) RHL .same key for different groups of circuit breakers (N.same key for different groups of circuit breakers (N.T2 KLC same key .plate in open/closed position 1SDC210856F0023 (1) 1SDA.. Key lock for rotary handle .plug-in in open position PLL ..KLC (1) Type T1-T2-T3 standard version KLC same key ..PLL Type PLL . 20005) KLF-S .

.different keys key lock in Open position .. 20008) MOL-M ..MIF Type 1SDC210841F0023 1SDA...lock only on manual operation with same key key lock in Open position ..FLD Type T4-T5 1SDC210840F0023 1SDA..MOL Type T4-T5 MOL-D different key MOL-S .same key for different groups of circuit breakers (N.same key code Mechanical compartment door lock Type Compartment door lock for rotary handle or front panel mounted on breaker 1SDA.same key for different groups of circuit breakers (N. 20006) MOL-S ..R1 T1-T2-T3 051396(1) 052165(1) MIF front interlocking plate between 2 circuit breakers MIF front interlocking plate between 3 circuit breakers (1) UL listed 7 7/36 ABB .for draw out Front flange for operating lever mechanism for fixed or plug-in Front flange for operating lever mechanism for draw out Flange for compartment door (1) UL listed Mechanical interlock . 20005) 1SDC210838F0023 1SDA.. 20007) MOL-S .same key for different groups of circuit breakers (N...R1 S6-S7 054904 054905 054906 054907 054908 054909 013885 013886 MOL-S ..Ordering codes Accessories Key lock for motor operator ..for fixed and plug-in FLD .R1 S6-S7 013880 Front lever operating mechanism ..same key for different groups of circuit breakers (N...R1 S6 S7 S8 054944(1) 054945(1) 014035 014036 014227 014228 045023 FLD .

.R1 T4-T5 054946(1) 054947(1) 054948(1) 054949(1) 054950(1) 054951(1) 054952(1) 054953(1) 063324 063325 060685(1) 060686(1) 014205 014206 S6 S7 MIR-P .plate for interlock type F Mechanical interlock across two circuit breakers ...horizontal Mechanical interlock across two circuit breakers ..R1 T1-T2-T3 051397 Residual current releases SACE RC221.plate for interlock type B MIR-P ..R1 4 poles 051401 051402 051405 051406 051409 051410 054954 054956 054955 051398 051400 051403 051404 051407 051408 RC221/2 for T2 RC222/2 for T2 RC221/3 for T3 RC222/3 for T3 RC222/4 for T4 RC223/4 for T4 RC222/5 for T5 1SDC210844F0023 Note: The residual current releases for T2 and T3 circuit breakers are always supplied complete with the FC Cu terminal kit.vertical (1) UL listed Note: To interlock two circuit breakers you have to order a frame unit interlock and a plate (for type A or B or C or D or E or F) interlock.plate for interlock type E MIR-P . SACE RC222.Mechanical interlock .plate for interlock type C MIR-P .frame unit vertical interlock MIR-P ..plate for interlock type D MIR-P . Sealable lock of thermal adjustment Type TMD release anti-adjustment seal 1SDA. 1SDC210845F0023 7 ABB 7/37 .....MIR Type T3 MIR-HB .plate for interlock type A 1SDC210842F0023 1SDA.frame unit horizontal interlock MIR-VB ... SACE RC223 (IEC only) Type 3 poles RC221/1 for T1 RC222/1 for T1 1SDC210843F0023 1SDA.

.diameter 230 mm Note: Opening coil and undervoltage coil to be ordered separately.R1 037388 037389 050542 037390 037391 037392 037393 037394 037395 050543 037396 037397 037398 Installation accessories Bracket for fixing onto DIN rail Type DIN50022 T1-T2 1SDC210846F0023 1SDA.diameter 180 mm Toroid which can be opened ..diameter 110 mm Toroid which can be opened .R1 3 poles 4 poles 051416 051418 051420 054959 054961 014041 051415 051417 051419 054958 054960 014040 HTC T1 HTC T2 HTC T3 HTC T4 HTC T5 High for fixed S6 Protection for high insulating terminal covers ..R1 T1-T2-T3 055270 051439 051937 051938 051939 053940 DIN50022 T3 DIN 50022 T1 ....Ordering codes Accessories SACE RCQ (IEC only) Type Relay and closed toroid ....diameter 185 mm Toroid which can be opened .HTC Type 1SDC210848F0023 1SDA.diameter 110 mm Relay and closed toroid .diameter 60 mm Closed toroid only .diameter 110 mm Relay and toroid which can be opened .T2 for RC221/RC222 DIN 50022 T3 for RC221/RC222 DIN 50022 T1 -T2 for MOS side-by-side DIN 50022 T1 for RC222 mod.diameter 230 mm Relay only Closed toroid only .HTC-P Type 1SDA..diameter 60 mm Relay and closed toroid ..diameter 185 mm Relay and toroid which can be opened ..diameter 110 mm Closed toroid only .. 200 mm Connections terminals 1SDC210847F0023 High insulating terminal covers . 1SDA..diameter 180 mm Relay and toroid which can be opened .R1 3 poles 4 poles 054963 054965 054962 054964 7 7/38 HTC-P T4 HTC-P T5 ABB ...

.R1 3 pieces 4 pieces 051467 051491 055001 055037 023389 023393 023396 6 pieces 051464 051488 054998 055034 013920 013954 014079 8 pieces 051465 051489 054999 055035 013921 013955 014080 051466 051490 055000 055036 023379 023383 023399 EF T2 EF T3 EF T4 EF T5 EF S6 600 EF S6 800 EF S7 7 ABB 7/39 ....S6 Low for fixed and moving part of plug-in or draw out circuit breakers .Low insulating terminal covers .R1 4 poles 051432 051434 051436 Sealable screws for terminal covers Type T1.STC 1SDC210849F0023 Type 3 poles STC T1 STC T2 STC T3 051431 051433 051435 1SDA...6 pieces .R1 T4-T5 054970 054971 054972 054973 051427 051428 051429 051430 PB100 low (H=100 mm) .EF Type 1SDC210853F0023 1SDA.S7 051421 051423 051425 054966 054968 014038 023324 1SDA....4p 1SDC210852F0023 PB200 high (H=200 mm) .T5 1SDC210850F0023 1SDA....4 pieces .R1 S6-S7 013699 051504 Sealable screws Separating partitions .......PB Type T1-T2-T3 1SDC210851F0023 1SDA..6 pieces .R1 4 poles 051422 051424 051426 054967 054969 014039 023325 IP40 front protections for screw terminals .3p PB200 high (H=200 mm) .3p PB100 low (H=100 mm) ...LTC Type 3 poles LTC T1 LTC T2 LTC T3 LTC T4 LTC T5 Low for fixed and moving part of plug-in or draw out circuit breakers .4p Front extended terminals ..4 pieces .

..R1 4 pieces 051451 051479 054977 055013 6 pieces 051448 051476 054974 055010 8 pieces 051449 051477 054975 055011 051450 051478 054976 055012 F T2 .F (1) Type 3 pieces 1SDC210860F0023 1SDA..Ordering codes Accessories Front terminals for copper-aluminium cables .Plugs with screws F T3 .external terminal FC CuAl S6 800 3x185mm2 .Plugs with screws F T4 .....external terminal (1) 053952(1) 053692 (1) 053696(1) 054984(1) 054988(1) 055028(1) 055020 063230 (1) (1) 053697(1) 053698(1) 054982(1) 054986(1) 055026(1) 055018(1) 063231(1) 1SDC210859F0023 2 2 052042(1) 052044(1) 052050(1) 052043(1) 052045(1) 052051(1) 052046(1) 052048(1) 052052(1) 052047(1) 052049(1) 052054(1) UL listed Front terminals .FC CuAl Type 1SDC210858F0023 1SDA.R1 4 pieces 051455 051483 054981 055017 055365 6 pieces 051452 051480 054978 055014 055362 8 pieces 051453 051481 054979 055015 055363 7 7/40 ABB .external terminal FC CuAl T5 400 1x240mm ....ES Type 1SDC210861F0023 1SDA..external terminal FC CuAl S6 600 2x240mm2 ..R1 3 pieces 4 pieces 051471 051495 055005 055041 6 pieces 051468 051492 055002 055038 8 pieces 051469 051493 055003 055039 051470 051494 055004 055040 050692 050704 050693 050694 050705 050695 050690 050691 050688 050689 ES T2 ES T3 ES T4 ES T5 ES S6 (1/2 upper kit) ES S6 (1/2 lower kit) ES S6 ES S7 (1/2 upper kit) ES S7 (1/2 lower kit) ES S7 1SDC210862F0023 Front terminals for copper cables ..R1 3 pieces 4 pieces 053953(1) 053693 (1) 6 pieces 053954(1) 053694 (1) 8 pieces 053955(1) 053695(1) 053699(1) FC CuAl 14-1/AWG 100A T2 UL/CSA FC CuAl 1/0AWG 100A T3 UL/CSA FC CuAl 1/0AWG 300Kcmil 225A T3 UL/CSA FC CuAl T4 1x50mm2 FC CuAl T4 1x185mm2 FC CuAl T5 400 2x120mm2 ...FC Cu Type 3 pieces FC Cu T2 FC Cu T3 FC Cu T4 1x185mm2 FC Cu T5 1x240mm2 FC Cu T5 2x240mm2 051454 051482 054980 055016 055364 1SDA.Plugs with screws F T5 .external terminal FC CuAl S7 1200 4x240mm2 .Plugs with screws (1) To be requested as loose kit Front extended spread terminals .external terminal FC CuAl T5 600 2x240mm ..

.R1 4 pieces 023392 6 pieces 013960 8 pieces 013961 Rear flat horizontal and vertical terminals .Rear terminals for copper-aluminium cables ....MC Type 1SDC210863F0023 1SDA...R1 3 pieces 4 pieces 054997 6 pieces 054994 8 pieces 054995 054996 MC CuAl T4 6x35mm2 Rear terminals 1SDC210864F0023 Type 3 pieces R T2 R T3 R T4 R T5 051474 051498 055008 055044 1SDA....R1 4 pieces 023391 023395 6 pieces 013924 013958 8 pieces 013925 013959 Front multi-cable terminals ......HR/VR Type 3 pieces S7 S8 023400 1SDA.RC CuAl Type 3 pieces RC CuAl T6 630 2x150mm2 RC CuAl T6 800 3x240mm2 023381 023385 1SDA.R1 4 pieces 023398 6 pieces 014083 046578 8 pieces 014084 046579 Kit for taking up voltage for auxiliares Type 3 pieces AuxV T2 AuxV T3 AuxV T4 AuxV T5 051500 051502 055046 055048 1SDA.....R Type 3 pieces S6 023382 1SDA...R1 4 pieces 051501 051503 055047 055049 7 ABB 7/41 .....R1 4 pieces 051475 051499 055009 055045 6 pieces 051472 051496 055006 055042 8 pieces 051473 051497 055007 055043 Threade rear terminals .

Ordering codes Accessories Front display unit .T4 100 CT for external neutral .R1 S6-S7 050718 050720 CT for external neutral Type CT for external neutral ..S6 600 CT for external neutral ..R1 051506 051507 051508 055097 7 7/42 RC222/RC223 for T4-T5 ABB .S6 800 CT for external neutral ..T5 600 CT for external neutral .. S6.S8 1600 CT for external neutral ....LSIG) Dialogue unit SACE PR212/D-L Lon + actuator unit SACE PR212/T for SACE PR212/P (LSI .......R1 052927 Dialogue unit Type Dialogue unit SACE PR212/D-M Modbus + actuator unit SACE PR212/T for SACE PR212/P (LSI .T5 400 CT for external neutral .R1 T4-T5 055051 1SDC210866F0023 Automatic transfer switch .T4 150 CT for external neutral .LSIG) 1SDA.T4 250 CT for external neutral .S8 2000 CT for external neutral ...FDU Type FDU display unit for T4-T5 with PR222 1SDA.....T5 300 CT for external neutral . S7 1SDA.R1 055052(1) 060625(1) 055054(1) 060626(1) 055057(1) 063322(1) 037418(1) 025778(1) 025779(1) 037419(1) 045015(1) 045016(1) 045017(1) UL listed Solenoid operator for residual current device Type RC221/RC222 for T1 RC221/RC222 for T2 RC221/RC222 for T3 1SDA.S8 2500 (1) 1SDA.S7 1200 CT for external neutral .ATS010 Type ATS010 for T4.. T5.S7 1000 CT for external neutral .

. PR212/P PR021/K .Module interface for PR222/PD-A Electrical/mechanical signalling and lock for PR212/P tripped (1) Available also for T2. PR222DS/PD.Accessories for electronic trip units Type T4-T5 Connector X4 electronic unit tripped signal and neutral protection for plug-in or draw out with PR222DS 1SDC210867F0023 1SDA.LSI X3.Signalling unit for electronic trip units type PR222DS/PD-A EP010 .LSIG X3 connector for relay tripped signal and neutral protection for plug-in or draw out circuit breaker with PR211/P. Spare parts Flanges for compartment door Type Flange for compartment door for T1-T2-T3 Flange for compartment door for MOS or RHD T1-T2-T3 Flange for compartment door T1 with RC221 or RC222 3p Flange for compartment door T2 with RC221 or RC222 3p Flange for compartment door T3 with RC221 or RC222 3p Flange for compartment door T1-T2-T3 with RC221 or RC222 4p Flange for compartment door for T4-T5 fixed or plug-in Flange for compartment door for T4-T5 draw out Flange for compartment door for RC222 for T4-T5 Front flange for operating lever mechanism for fixed or plug-in for S6 Front flange for operating lever mechanism for fixed or plug-in for S7 Front flange for operating lever mechanism for draw out for S6 Front flange for operating lever mechanism for draw out for S7 Flange for compartment door for S8 (1) 1SDA.Test and configuration unit for electronic trip units type PR222DS/P.Test unit (1) Dialogue unit SACE PR212/D + actuator unit SACE PR212/T PR212/K S8 PR010/T . X4 connector for relay tripped signal and neutral protection for plug-in or draw out circuit breaker with PR212/P .R1 S6-S7 S8 055062 055061 055060 055059 013702 013704 013703 013705 037121 037121 045020 045021 048964 059146 059469 046581 048964 059146 048964 059146 Connector X3 electronic unit tripped signal for plug-in or draw out with PR222DS Connector X4 electronic unit tripped signal and neutral protection for fixed with PR222DS Connector X3 electronic unit tripped signal for fixed with PR222DS X3 connector for relay tripped signal and neutral protection for fixed circuit breaker with PR211/P.... PR212/P ... X4 connector for relay tripped signal and neutral protection for fixed circuit breaker with PR212/P ..LSI X3.R1 051509 051510 051511 051512 051513 051514 055094 055095 055096 014035 014227 014036 014228 045023(1) UL listed 7 ABB 7/43 .. PR212/P .LSIG TT1 .

35 24123 Bergamo.Due to possible developments of standards as well as of materials.p. ABB SACE S.CAL . Breakers Via Baioni.abb.: +39 035.com 1SDC210018D0202 .V.111 .07/2007 Printed in Italy 2.Telefax: +39 035.395.395.306-433 http://www. the characteristics and dimensions specified in the present catalogue may only be considered binding after confirmation by ABB SACE.000 .A An ABB Group company L. Italy Tel.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful